44 Acts

The Rheims New Testament (1582) — Acts

The Acts of the Apostles, as printed in the Rheims New Testament of 1582, the English Catholic translation made from the Latin Vulgate at the English College, then in exile at Rheims, chiefly by Gregory Martin. The page gives the edition's argument of the book, all 28 chapters, each with its printed summary, every verse in the original spelling, and the marginal notes (cross-references, the days on which passages are read, and other readings); the edition's annotations follow 21 of the 28 chapters, as printed.

The Argument

❧ THE ARGVMENT OF THE ACTES OF THE APOSTLES.

THE Goſpel hauing ſhevved, hovv the Ievves moſt impiouſly rèiected Chriſt (as alſo Moyſes and the Prophets had foretold of them:) and therefore deſerued to be reiected themſelues alſo of him: novv folovveth this booke of the Actes of the Apoſtles ( vvritten by S. Luke in Rome the fourth y⟨illegible⟩r⟨illegible⟩ of Nero, An. Dom. 61) and ſhevveth, hovv notvvithſtanding their deſertes, Chriſt of his mercy (as the Prophets alſo had foretold of him) offered him ſelfe vnto that vnvvorthy people, yea after that they had Crucified him, ſending vnto them his tvvelue Apoſtles to moue them to penance, and ſo by Baptiſme to make them of his Church: and vvhiles al the Tvvelue vvere ſo occupied about the Ievves: hovv of a perſecuting Ievve he made an extraordinarie Apoſtle (vvho vvas S. Paul) and to auoide the ſcādal of the Ievves (to vvhom onely him ſelfe likevviſe for the ſame cauſe had preached) ſent him, and not any of his Twelue by and by, who were his knovven Apoſtles, vnto the Gentiles, vvho neuer afore had Heard of Chriſt, and vvere vvorſhippers of many Gods, to moue them alſo (for, that likevviſe the Prophets had foretold) to faith and penance, and ſo by Baptiſme to make them of his Church: and hovv the incredulous Ievves euery vvhere reſiſted the ſame Apoſtle and his preaching to the Gentiles, perſecuting him and ſeeking his death, and neuer ceaſing vntil he fel into the handes of the Gentils: that ſo (as not onely he euery vvhere, but alſo the Prophets afore him, and Chriſt had foretold) the Goſpel might be taken avvay from them, and giuen to the Gentiles: euen from Hieruſalem (vvhoſe reprobation alſo by name had been often foretold) the headcitie of the Iewes, vvhere it began, tranſlated to Rome the headcitie of the Gentiles. Al this vvil be euident by the partes of the booke: vvhich may be theſe ſixe. [Margin: * Hier. in Catal. · Act. 13, 46, 1⟨illegible⟩, 6▪ ⟨illegible⟩9, 9. 28, 28. · Mat. 21, 23▪ · Eſa. 1. · Luc. 13, 33.]

Firſt, hovv Chriſt Aſcending in the ſight of his Diſciples, promiſed vnto them the Holy ghoſt, fortelling that of him they ſhould receiue ſtrength, and ſo begin his Church in Hieruſalem: and from thence dilate it into al that Countrie, that is into al Iurie: yea and into Samaria alſo yea into al Nations of the Gentiles, be they neuer ſo far of. You ſhal receiue (ſaith he) the vertue of the Holy ghoſt cōming vpon you: and you ſhal be witneſſes vnto me in Hieruſalem, & in al Iurie, and Samaria, and euen to the vtmoſt of the earth. Chap. 1.

Secondly, the beginning of the Church in Hieruſalem, accordingly. Chap. 2.

Thirdly, the propagation of it conſequently into al Iurie, and alſo to Samaria. Chap. 8.

Fourthly, the propagation of it to the Gentiles alſo. Chap. 10.

Fifthly, the taking of it avvay from the obſtinate Ievves, and geuing of it to the Gentiles, by the miniſterie of S. Paul and S. Barnabee. Chap. 13.

Sixthly, of taking it avvay from Hieruſalem it ſelfe, the headcitie of the Ievves, and ſending it (as it vvere) to Rome the headcitie of the Gentiles, and that, in their perſecuting of Paul ſo far, * that he appealed to Caeſar, and ſo deliuering him after a ſort vnto the Romanes: as they bad * before deliuered to them alſo Chriſt him ſelfe. vvhere as S. Peters firſt cōming thither, vvas vpon an other occaſion, as ſhalbe ſaid anone. Of vvhich Romanes and Gentiles therfore, the ſame S. Paul being novv come to Rome (the laſt Chap. of the Actes) foretelleth the obſtinat Ievves there,ſaying: Et ipſi audient. You vvil not heare, but, they vvil heare. that ſo the prediction of Chriſt aboue rehearſed might be fulfilled: And euen to the vtmoſt of the earth. And there doth S. Luke end the booke, not caring to tel ſo much as the fulfilling of that vvhich our Lord had foretold (Act. 27, 24) to S. Paul, Thou muſt appeare before Caeſar. becauſe his purpoſe vvas no more but to ſhevv the nevv Hieruſalem of the Chriſtians, vvhere Chriſt vvould place the cheefe ſeate of his Church, as alſo in deede the Fathers and al other Catholikes haue in al ages looked thither, vvhen they vvere in any great doubt: no leſſe then the Ievves to Hieruſalem, as they vvere appointed in the old Teſtament. Deut. 17, 8. [Margin: Act. 25. 11. · Luc. 23, 1. · Act. 28, 28.]

And ſo this Booke doth ſhevv the true Church, as plainely, as the Goſpel doth ſhevv the true Chriſt, vnto al that do not vvilfully ſhut their ovvne ⟨illegible⟩ies, to vvit, this to be the true Church, vvhich beginning viſibly at Hieruſalem, vvas taken from the Ievves, and tranſlated to the Gentils (and namely to Rome) continuing viſibly, and viſibly to continue hereafter alſo, Vntil the fulnes of the Gentiles ſhal be come in: that then alſo Al Iſraël may be ſaued. and then is come the end of the vvorld. For ſo did Chriſt moſt plainely foretel vs: This Goſpel of the Kingdom ſhalbe preached in the vvhole world, for a teſtimonie to al Nations. and then ſhal come the conſummation. For the conuerſion of vvhich Nations and accompliſhing the fulnes of al Gentiles, the foreſaid Church Catholike, being mindful of her office. to be Chriſtes witnes euen to the vtmoſt of the earth, doth at this preſent (as alvvaies) ſend preachers to conuert and make them alſo Chriſtians: vvhereas the proteſtants and * al other Heretikes do nothing els but ſubuert ſuch as before vvere Chriſtians. [Margin: Rom. 11, 25. · Mat. 24, ⟨illegible⟩4. · Tertul. de pr⟨illegible⟩e.]

And this being the Summe and ſcope of this Booke, thus to giue vs hiſtorically a iuſt ſight of the fulfilling of the Prophets & Chriſtes prediction about the Church: it is not to be marueiled at, vvhy it telleth not of S. Peter cōming to Rome: conſidering that his firſt cōming thither, vvas not, as S. Paules vvas, by the Ievves deliuerie of him, working ſo to their ovvne reprobatiō, but vpō another occaſion, to vvit, to confound Simon Magus. Euſ. Hiſt. li. 2. c. 12. 13. For vvho alſo ſeeth not, that it maketh no mention of his préaching to any Gentiles at al, thoſe fevv onely Act. 10 excepted, vvho vvere the firſt, and therefore (leſt the Gentiles ſhould ſeeme leſſe cared for of God, then the Ievves) Peter being the Head of al, vvas elected of God, to incorporate them into the church, as before he had done the Ievves. God (ſaith he) among vs choſe, that by my mouth the Gentiles ſhould heare the vvord of the Goſpel, and beleeue. and S. Iames therevpon: Simon hath told how God firſt viſited to take of the Gentiles a people to his name. But othervviſe (I ſay) here is no mention of Peters preaching to any Gentiles: no nor of the other eleuen Apoſtles. Vvil any man therfore inferre, that neither Peter, nor the other Eleuen preached to any Nation or citie of the Gentiles? No▪ the meaning of the Holy ghoſt vvas not to vvrite al the Actes of al the Apoſtles, no nor the preaching of Peter and his, to the Gentiles, but onely to the Ievves: thereby to ſet out vnto the vvorld, the great mercy of Chriſt tovvard thoſe vnvvorthy Ievves, and conſequently their moſt vvorthy reprobation for cōtemning ſuch grace and mercy▪ as alſo on the other ſide to ſhevv, hovv readily the Gentiles in ſo many Nations, vvere conuerted by one Apoſtle onely, vvho From Hieruſalem euen to Illy⟨illegible⟩icum, repleniſhed the Goſpel of Chriſt. And this parting of the vvorke ſo made by S. Peter vvith the reſt, doth S. Paul him ſelfe touche: That vve vnto the Gentiles, and they vnto the Circunciſion. Neuertheleſſe before his cōming to Rome, not onely vvas the Church come to Rome (as it is euident Act. the laſt chap.) there plāted by S. Peter and others (as likevviſe by S. Peter it vvas planted in the firſt Gentils, before that S. Paul began the taking of it avvay from the multitude of the Ievves, and the tranſlating of it to the multitude of the Gentils) but alſo ſo not able vvas the ſame Church of Rome, that S. Paul vvriting his Epiſtle to the Romanes, before he came thither, ſaith: Your faith is renovvmed in the vvhole vvorld. and therefore they vvith the reſt of the Gentiles, be that Nation vvhereof Chriſt told the Ievves, ſaying: The Kingdom of God ſhal be taken avvay from you, & ſhal be giuē to a Nation yelding the fruites thereof. [Margin: Act. 15. 7. · Act. 15, 14. · Rom. 15, 19. · Gal. 2, 9. · Rom. 1, 8. · Mat. 21, 43.]

As before vve noted the Goſpels, as they are read both at Mattins and Maſſe, through out the yere, in their conuenient time and place: ſo the bookes folovving (as alſo the bookes of the old Teſtament) are read in the ſaid Seruice of the Church, for Epiſtles and Leſſons, in their time & place, as hereafter ſhal be noted in euery of them. See the very ſame order and cuſtome of the primitiue Church, in S. Ambroſe ep. 33. S. Auguſtine Serm. de Tempore 139, 140, 141, 144. S. Leo Ser. 2 & 4 de Quadrag. & Ser. 13 & 19 de Paſs. Domini. S. Gregorie in his 40 homilies vpon the Goſpels.

[Margin, at the head of the book: The CHVRCH readeth this booke at Mattins from Low Sūday vnto the 3 Sunday after Eaſter: euen as in S. Auguſtines time. See ſerm. 83 & 93 de Diuerſis. ⟨illegible⟩o. 10.]

Chapter 1

Chriſt novv ready to aſcend, biddeth the Apoſtles to expect the Holy Ghoſt vvhich he had promiſed. foretelling vvhere (being ſtrengthened by him) they ſhould begin his Church, and hovv far they ſhould cary it. 9 After his Aſcenſion they are vvarned by tvvo Angels to ſet their mindes vpon his ſecond comming. 14 In the daies of their expectation, 15 Peter beginneth to execute his vicarſhip, giuing inſtruction and order, by vvhich Mathias is elected Apoſtle in the place of Iudas.

1 THE * firſt treatiſe I made of al things, O Theophilus, vvhich IESVS began to doe and to teache,

2 vntil the day vvherein ″ giuing commaundement by the holy Ghoſt to the Apoſtles vvhom he choſe, he vvas aſſumpted:

3 to vvhō he ſhevved alſo him ſelf aliue after his paſſion in many arguments, for fourtie daies appearing to them, & ſpeaking of the kingdom of God.

4 And eating vvith them, * he commaunded them, that they ſhould not depart from Hieruſalem, but ſhould expect the promiſſe of the Father, vvhich you * haue heard (ſaith he) by my mouth:

5 for Iohn in deede baptized vvith vvater, but * you ſhal be baptized vvith the holy Ghoſt after theſe fevv daies. ⟨illegible⟩

6 They therfore that vvere aſſembled, aſked him, ſaying, Lord, whether at this time vvilt thou reſtore the kingdom to Iſrael?

7 but he ſaid to them, ″ It is not for you to knovv times or moments, vvhich the Father hath put in his ovvne povver:

8 but you ſhal receiue the * vertue of the holy Ghoſt comming vpon you, and you ſhal be vvitneſſes vnto me in Hieruſalem, and in al Ievvrie, and Samaria, and euen to the vtmoſt of the earth.

9 And * vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, in their ſight he vvas eleuated: and a cloud receiued him out of their ſight.

10 And vvhen they beheld him going into heauen, behold tvvo men ſtoode beſide them in vvhite garments,

11 vvho alſo ſaid, Ye men of Galilee, vvhy ſtand you looking into heauen? This IESVS vvhich is ″ aſſumpted from you into heauen, ſhal ſo come as you haue ſeen him going into heauen. ⊢

12 Then they returned to Hieruſalem from the mount that is called Oliuet, vvhich is by Hieruſalem, diſtant a Sabboths iourney.

13 And vvhen they vvere entred in, they vvent vp into an vpper chamber, vvhere abode Peter & Iohn, Iames and Andrevv, Philippe and Thomas, Bartholomevv and Mathevv, Iames of Alphaeus and Simon Zelótes, and Iude of Iames.

14 Al theſe vvere perſeuéring vvith one minde in praier vvith the vvomen and ″ MARIE the mother of IESVS, and his brethren.

15 In thoſe daies ″ Peter riſing vp in the middes of the brethren, ſaid: (and the multitude of perſons together, vvas almoſt an hundred and tvventie)

16 You men, brethren, *the ſcripture muſt be fulfilled vvhich the holy Ghoſt ſpake before by the mouth of Dauid concerning Iudas, vvho vvas the * captaine of them that apprehended IESVS:

17 vvho vvas numbred among vs and obteined the lot of this miniſterie.

18 And he in deede hath poſſeſſed a * field of the revvard of iniquitie, and being hanged he burſt in the middes, and al his bovvels guſhed out.

19 And it vvas made notorious to al the inhabitants of Hieruſalem: ſo that the ſame field vvas called in their tonge, Hacel-dema, that is to ſay, the field of bloud.

20 For it is vvritten in the booke of Pſalmes. Be their habitation made deſert, and be there none to dvvel in it. And his Biſhoprike let another take.

21 Therfore, of theſe men that haue aſſembled vvith vs, al the time that our Lord IESVS vvent in and vvent out among vs,

22 beginning from the baptiſme of Iohn vntil the day vvherein he vvas aſſumpted from vs, there muſt one of theſe be made a vvitnes vvith vs of his reſurrection.

23 And they appointed tvvo, Ioſeph, vvho vvas called Barſabas, vvho vvas ſurnamed Iuſtus: and Mathias.

24 And praying they ſaid, Thou Lord that knovveſt the harts of al men, ſhevv of theſe tvvo, one, vvhom thou haſt choſen,

25 to take the place of this miniſterie and Apoſtleſhip, from the vvhich Iudas hath preuaricated that he might goe to his ovvne place.

26 And they gaue them ″ lottes, and the lot fel vpon Mathias, and he vvas numbered vvith the eleuen Apoſtles. ⊢

Marginal notes to Chapter 1

Heading The 1. part.
Argument The expectatiō of the Holy Ghoſt betwene the Aſcenſiō of Chriſt, and the beginning of the Church.
v. 1 ⸬ Not al particularly, (for the other Euangeliſts write diuers thinges not touched by him) but al the principal and moſt neceſſarie thinges.
v. 1 Lu. 1, 3.
v. 1 The Epiſtle ⟨illegible⟩t Maſſe vpon Aſcenſion day.
v. 4 Iu. 24, 49.
v. 4 Io. 14, 26.
v. 5 ⸬ Iohns Baptiſme gaue not the Holy Ghoſt.
v. 5 ⸬ The aboundāt powring of the Holy Ghoſt vpon them on whitſunday, he calleth baptiſme.
v. 5 Lu. 3, 16.
v. 7 Lu. 24, 49. Act. 2, 1.
v. 8 Mar. 16, 19. Lu. 24, 51.
v. 13 ⸬ This viſible companie was the true Churche of Chriſt, which he left, & commaūded to keepe together til the cōming of the Holy Ghoſt by h to be further informed & furniſhed to gaine al natiōs to the ſame Societie.
v. 14 ⸬ The Heretikes, ſome in the text, other in the margēt, traſlate, Wiues, to wit, of the Apoſtles, moſt Impudently, knowīg in their cōſciences that he meaneth the Maries & other holy women that folowed Chriſt. as Lu. 1, 2, 24, 10. See Beza & the Engl. Bible 1579.
v. 15 ᵃ The Epiſtle vpō S. Mathias day Febr. ⟨illegible⟩4.
v. 16 Pſ. 40, 9▪
v. 16 Io. 13, 18▪
v. 17 Luc. 22, 47. Io. 18, 3.
v. 18 Mt. 27, 5. 7.
v. 20 Pſa. 68, 26.
v. 20 Pſ. 108, 8.
v. 22 ⸬ No ſmal myſterie, that the number of the twelue Apoſtles muſt needes be made vp againe.

Annotations to Chapter 1

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. I.

2. Giuing commaundement.] He meaneth the power giuen them to preach to baptize▪ to remit ſinnes, and generally the whole commiſſion and charge of gouernement of the Church after him and in his name, ſteede, and right▪ the which Regiment was giuen them together with the Holy Ghoſt to aſſiſt them therein for euer.

7. It is not for you.] It is not for vs, nor needful for the Church, to know the times & moment of the world, the comming of Antichriſt, and ſuch other Gods ſecretes. This is ynough in that caſe, to be aſſured that Chriſts faith ſhal be preached, and the Church ſpred through out al Nations, the Holy Ghoſt concurring continually with the Apoſtles and their Succeſſors for the ſame. [Margin: The times and moments of things to come pertaine not to vs.]

11. Aſſumpted from you.] By this viſible Aſcending of Chriſt to heauen and like returne from thence to iudgement, the Heretikes do incredulouſly argue, him not to be in the Sacrament. But let the faithful rather giue eare to S. Chryſoſtome ſaying thus: O miracle, he that ſitteth vvith the Father in heauen aboue, at the very ſame time is handled of men beneath. Chriſt aſcending to heauen, both hath his fleſh vvith him, and left it vvith vs beneath. Eliae⟨illegible⟩ being taken vp, left to his Diſciple his cloke only: but the Sonne of man aſcending left his ovvne fleſh to vs. Li. ⟨illegible⟩ de Sacerd. Ho. 2 ad po. Ant. in fine. Ho. de diuit. & paup. in fine. [Margin: Chriſt is aſcended, and yet really in the B. Sacrament.]

14. MARIE the mother of IESVS.] This is the laſt mention that is made in holy Scripture, of our B Lady. for though ſhe were ful of al diuine wiſedom, and opened (no doubt) vnto the Euangeliſtes and other writers of holy Scriptures, diuerſe of Chriſts actions, ſpeaches, and myſteries, whereof ſhe had both experimental and reuealed knowledge: Yet for that ſhe was a woman, and the humbleſt creature liuing, and the paterne of al order and obedience, it pleaſed not God that there ſhould be any further note of her life, doings, or death, in the Scriptures. She liued the reſt of her time with the Chriſtians (as here ſhe is peculiarly named and noted among them) and ſpecially with S. Iohn the Apoſtle, * to whom our Lord recommended her. Who prouided for her al neceſſaries, her ſpouſe Ioſeph (as it may be thought) being deceaſed before. The common opinion is that ſhe liued 63 yeres in al. At the time of her death, (as S. Denys firſt, & after him S. Damaſcene de dormit. Deiparae. writeth.) al the Apoſtles then diſperſed into diuers nations to preache the Goſpel, were miraculouſly brought together (ſauing S. Thomas who came the third day after) to Hieruſalem, to honour her diuine departure and funeral, as the ſaid S. Denys witneſſeth. Who ſaith that him ſelf, S. Timothee, and S. Hierotheus were preſent: teſtifying alſo of his owne hearing, that both before here death and after for three daies, not onely the Apoſtles and other holy men preſent, but the Angels alſo and Powers of heauen did ſing moſt melodious Hymnes. They buried her ſacred body in Gethſémaui, but for S. Thomas ſake, who deſired to ſee and to reuerence it, they opened the ſepulcher the third day, and finding it void of the holy body, but excedingly fragrant, they returned, aſſuredly deeming that her body was aſſumpted into heauen, as the Church of God holdeth, being moſt agreable to the ſingular priuilege of the mother of God, and therfore celebrateth moſt ſolemnely the day of her Aſſumption. And that is conſonant not onely to the ſaid S. Denys, and S. Damaſcene, but to holy Athanaſius alſo, who auoucheth the ſame, Serm. in Euang. de Deipara. of which Aſſumption of her body. S. Bernard alſo wrote fiue notable ſermons extant in his workes. [Margin: Our B. LADY. · Her life. · Io. 19, 26. 27. · Dionyſ. ep. ad Timotheum. · Her death. · Her ASSVMVTION.]

But neither theſe holy fathers, nor the Churches tradition and teſtimonie, do beare any ſway now a daies with the Proteſtants, that haue aboliſhed this her greateſt feaſt of her Aſſumption. who of reaſon ſhould at the leaſt celebrate it as the day of her death, as they doe of other Saincts. For though they beleeue not that her body is aſſumpted, yet they wil not (we trow) deny that ſhe is dead, and her ſoule in glorie: neither can they aſke ſcriptures for that, no more then they require for the deathes of Peter, Paul, Iohn, and other, vvhich be not mentioned in ſcriptures & yet are ſtill celebrated by the Proteſtants. But concerning the B. Virgin MARIE, they haue blotted out alſo both her Natiuitie, and her Conception: ſo as it may be thought the Diuel beareth a ſpecial malice to this woman whoſe ſeede brake his head. For as for the other two daies of her Purification & Aununciation, they be not proper to our Lady, but the one to Chriſts Conception, the other to his Preſentation▪ ſo that ſhe by this meanes ſhal haue no feſtiuitie at al. [Margin: The Proteſtāts haue no feaſt of her at al, as they haue of other Saincts.]

But contrariwiſe, to conſider how the auncient Church and fathers eſteemed, ſpake, and wrote of this excellent veſſel of grace, may make vs deteſt theſe mens impietie, that can not abide the praiſes of her whom al generations ſhould call bleſſed, and that eſteeme her honours a derogatiō to her ſonne. Some of their ſpeaches we wil ſet downe, that al men may ſee, that we neither praiſe her, nor pray to her, more amply then they did. S. Athan⟨illegible⟩ſius in the place alleaged, after he had declared how al the Angelical ſpirits and euery order of them honoured and praiſed her with the AVE, wherewith S. Gabriel ſaluted her; We alſo, ſaith he, of al degrees vpon the earth ⟨illegible⟩xtol thee with loude voice, ſaying, Au⟨illegible⟩ gratia plena &c. Haile ful of grace, our Lord is vvith thee pray for vs ⟨illegible⟩ Maiſtreſſe, and Lady, and Queens, and mother of God. Moſt holy and auncient Ephrem, alſo in a ſpecial oration made in praiſe of our Lady, ſaith thus in diuerſe places thereof, Intemerata De⟨illegible⟩p⟨illegible⟩ &c. Mother of God vndifiled, Queene of al, the hope of them that deſpaire, my lady moſt glorious, higher them the heauenly ſpirit⟨illegible⟩, more honorable then the Cherubins, holier then the Seraphins▪ and vvithout compariſon more glorious thē the ſupernal hoſtes, the hope of the fathers, the glorie of the Prophets, the praiſe of the Apoſtles. And a litle after. Virgo ante partum, in partu, & poſt partum▪ by thee vve are reconciled to Chriſt my God, thy ſonne: thou art the helper of ſinners, thou the hauen for them that are toſſed vvith ſtormes, the ſolam of the vvorld, the deliuerer of the empriſoned, the helpe of orphans, the redemption of captiues. And afterward, Vouchſafe me thy ſeruant to praiſe thee. Haile lady MARIE ful of grace, haile Virgin moſt bleſed among vvomen. And much more in that ſenſe which were to long to repeate. [Margin: How the Primitiue Church & auncient fathers honoured our B. Lady. · * Lu. 1, 48. · S. Athanaſius. · S. Ephrem.]

S. Cyril. hath the like wonderful ſpeaches of her honour, hom. 6. contra Naeſtorium. Praiſe and glorie be to thee ⟨illegible⟩ holy Trinitieito thee alſo be praiſe, holy mother of God, for thou art the pretious pearle of the vvorld, thou the candel of vnquencheable light, the crovvne of Virginitis, the ſcepter of the Catholike faith. By thee the Trinitie is glorified and adored in al the vvorld: by thee heauen reioyceth, Angels and Archangels are glad, diuels are put to flight, and man is called againe to heauen, and euery creature that vvas held vvith the errour of Idols, is turned to the knowledge of the truth: by thee Churches are foūded through the world: thee being their helper, the Gentiles come to penance▪ and much more which we omit. Likewiſe the Greeke Liturgies or Maſſes of S. Iames, S. Baſil, and S. Chryſoſtom, make moſt honorable mention of our B. Lady, praying vnto her, ſaluting her with the Angelical hymne, Au⟨illegible⟩ Maria, and vſing theſe ſpeaches, Moſt holy, vndefiled, bleſſed aboue al, our Queene, our Lady, the mother of God, MARIE, a virgin for ouer, the ſacred arke of Chriſts Incarnation, broder then the heauens that didſt beare they creatour, holy mother, of vnſpeakable light, vve magnifie thee vvith Angelical hymnes. al things paſſe vnderſtanding, al things are glorious in thee ô mother of God▪ by thee the myſterie before vnknovven to the Angels, is made manifeſt and reuealed to them on the earth▪ thou art more honorable then the Cheerubins, and more glorious then the Seraphins, to thee, O ful of grace, al creatures, both men and Angels doe gratulate and reioyce: glorie be to thee, Which art a ſanctified temple, a ſpiritual paradiſe, the glorie of virgins, of vvhom God tooke fleſh and made thy vvombe to be his throne, &c. [Margin: S. Cyril. · The Greeke Liturgies of S. Iames, S. Baſil, S. Chryſoſtom.]

And S. Auguſtine Serm. 18. de Sanctis ⟨illegible⟩o. 10: or (as ſome thinke) S. Fulgentius: O bleſſed MARIE, who can be able vvorthily to praiſe or thanke thee, receiue our praiers, obtaine vs out requeſtes, for thou art the ſpecial hope of ſinners, by thee vve hope for pardon of our ſinnes, & in thee, ô moſt bleſſed, is the expectation of our revvards. And then folow theſe wordes now vſed in the Churches ſeruice: Sancta Maria ſuſcurre miſeris, iuua puſillanimes, refoue flebiles, orapro populo, interueni pro lero, intercede pro deuoto foemineo ſexu. Sentiant omnes tuum inuamen, quicunque celebrant tuam commemorationem. Pray thou continually for the people of God, vvhich didſt diſerue to beare the redeemer of the vvorld, Who liueth and reigneth for euer. S. Damaſcene alſo ſer. de dormitione Deiparae. Let vs crie vvith Gabriel, Aue gratia plena, Haile ful of grace, Haile ſea of ioy that can not be emptied, haile the onely caſe of greefes, haile holy virgin, by vvhom death vvas expelled, and life brought in. See S. Irenaeus li. 3▪ c. 33. and li. 5 circa medium, & S. Auguſtine de ſide & Symbolo. & de agone Chriſtiano. Where they declare how both the ſexes concurre to our ſaluation, the man and the woman, Chriſt and our Lady, as Adam and Eue both were the cauſe of our fall, though Adam for more then his wife, and ſo Chriſt far more excellently and in an other ſort then our Lady: who (though his mother) yet is but his creature and handmaid, him ſelf being truely both God and man. In al which places alleaged & * many other like to theſe, if it pleaſe the reader to ſee and read, and make his owne eies witneſſes, he ſhal perceiue that there is much more ſaid of her, and to her, then we haue here recited, and that the very ſame or the like ſpeaches and termes were vſed then, that the Church vſeth now, in the honour and inuocation of the B. Virgin: to the confuſion of al thoſe that wilfully wil not vnderſtand in what ſenſe al ſuch ſpeaches are applied vnto her. to wit, either becauſe of her praier and interceſſion for vs. whereby ſhe is our hope, our refuge, our aduocate &c. or becauſe ſhe brought forth the author of our redemption and ſaluation, whereby ſhe is the mother of mercie, and grace, and life, and whatſoeuer goodnes we receiue by Chriſt. [Margin: S. Auguſtine. · * vnica ſpes▪ · Sancta MARIA ſuccurre miſeris, &c. · S. Damaſcene. · * vnicum leuamen · S. Irenaeus. · As Adam and Eue, ſo Chriſt & our Lady. · See S. Greg Nzian. in fi. Trag. Chriſtus patiens. · The meaning of the titles and termes giuen to our B. Lady.]

15. Peter riſing vp.) Peter in the meane time practiſed his Superioritie in the cōpanie or Church, publiſhing an election to be made of one to ſupply Iudas roome. Which Peter did not vpon commaundement of Chriſt written, but by ſuggeſtion of Gods Spirit, and by vnderſtanding the Scriptures of the old Teſtament to that purpoſe: the ſenſe whereof Chriſt had opened to the Apoſtles before his departure, though in more ful maner afterward at the ſending of the Holy Ghoſt. And this acte of Peter in preſcribing to the Apoſtles and the reſt, this election, and the maner thereof, is ſo euident for his Supremacie, that * the Aduerſa⟨illegible⟩ies confeſſe here that he was, Antiſtes, the cheefe and Biſhop of this whole College and companie. [Margin: Peter beginneth to practiſe his Primacie. · Beza in no. Teſt. ⟨illegible⟩. an. 1565.]

26. Loties.] When the euent or fall of the lot is not expected of Diuels, nor of the ſtarres, nor of any force of fortune, but looked and praied for to be directed by God and his holy Saincts: then may lottes be vſed lawfully. And ſometimes to diſcerne betwixt two things mere indifferent, they be neceſſarie, as S. Auguſtine teacheth ⟨illegible⟩p. 180 ad Honoratum. [Margin: Caſting of lottes.]

Chapter 2

The Holy Ghoſt comming to the Faithful vpon vvhitſunday. 5 Ievves in Hieruſalem of al Nations do vv⟨illegible⟩nder to heare ⟨illegible⟩hem ſpeaks al tongues. 14 And Peter to the deriders declareth, that it is not drunkennes, but the Holy Ghoſt vvhich Ioel did prophecie of, vvhich IESVS (whom they crucified) being now riſen againe and aſcended (as he ſheweth alſo out of the Scriptures) hath powred ou⟨illegible⟩ from heauen, cōcluding therfore that he is CHRIST, and they moſt horrible murderers. 17 Whereat they being compuncte, and ſubmitting them ſelues, he telleth them that they muſt be baptized, and then they alſo ſhal receiue the ſame Holy Ghoſt, as being promiſed to al the baptized. 41 And ſo 3000 are baptized that very day. 42 Whoſe godly exerciſes are here reported, and alſo their liuing in ſtate of perfection. The Apoſtles worke many miracles, and God daily increaſeth the number of the Church.

1 AND vvhen the daies of ″ Pentecoſt vvere accompliſhed, they vvere al together in one place:

2 and ſodenly there vvas made a ſound from heauen, as of a vehemēt vvinde cōming, & it filled the whole houſe vvhere they vvere ſitting.

3 And there appeared to them parted tonges as it were * of fire, and it ſate vpon euery one of them:

4 and they vvere ″ al repleniſhed vvith the * HOLY GHOST, and they began to ſpeake vvith diuerſe tonges, according as the HOLY GHOST gaue them to ſpeake.

5 And there vvere dvvelling at Hieruſalē Ievves, deuout men of euery nation that is vnder heauen.

6 And vvhen this voice vvas made, the multitude came together, and vvas aſtonied in minde, becauſe euery man heard them ſpeake in his ovvne tongue.

7 And they vvere al amaſed, and marueled ſaying, Are not, lo, al theſe that ſpeake, Galil⟨illegible⟩ans,

8 and hovv haue vve heard' eche man our ovvne tongue vvherein vve vvere borne?

9 Parthians, and Medians, and Elamites, and that inhabite Meſo potámia, Ievvrie, and Cappadocia, Pontus, and Aſia,

10 Phrygia, and Pamphilia, Aegypt and the partes of Lybia that is about Cyrénee, and ſtrangers of Rome,

11 Ievves alſo, and Proſelytes, Cretenſians, and Arabians: Vve haue heard' them ſpeake in our ovvne tonges the great vvorkes of God. ⊢

12 And they vvere al aſtonied, and marueled, ſaying one to an other, Vvhat meaneth this?

13 But others deriding ſaid, That theſe are ful of nevv vvine.

14 But Peter ſtanding vvith the Eleuen, lifted vp his voice, and ſpake to them, Ye men, Ievves, and al you that dvvel in Hieruſalem, be this knovven to you, and vvith your eares receiue my vvordes.

15 For theſe are not drunke, as you ſuppoſe, vvhereas it is the third houre of the day:

16 But this is it that vvas ſaid by the Prophet Ioël,

17 And it ſhal be, in the laſt daies (ſaith our Lord) of my Spirit I vvil povvre out vpon al fleſh: and your ſonnes and your daughters ſhal prophecie, and your yong men ſhal ſee viſions, and your auncients ſhal dreame dreames.

18 And vpon my ſeruants truely, and vpon my handmaides vvil I povvre out in thoſe daies, of my Spirit, and they ſhal prophecie:

19 and I vvil giue vvonders in the heauen aboue, and ſignes in the earth beneath, bloud, and fire, and vapour of ſmoke.

20 The ſunne ſhal be turned into darkenes, and the moone into bloud, before the great and manifeſt day of our Lord doth come.

21 And it ſhal be, euery one vvhoſoeuer calleth vpon the name of our Lord, ſhal be ſaued. ⊢

22 Ye men of Iſraël heare theſe vvordes, IESVS of Nazareth a man approued of God among you, by miracles and vvonders and ſignes vvhich God did by him in the middes of you, as you knovv:

23 this ſame, ″ by the determinate counſel and preſcience of God being deliuered, you by the handes of vvicked men haue crucified and ſlaine.

24 vvhom God hath raiſed vp ″ looſing the ſorovves of hel, according as it vvas impoſſible that he ſhould be holden of it.

25 For Dauid ſaith concerning him, I foreſavv the Lord in my ſight alvvaies: becauſe he is at my right hand that I be not moued.

26 For this, my hart hath been glad and my tongue hath reioyced: moreouer my fleſh alſo ſhal reſt in hope.

27 Becauſe thou vvilt not leaue ″ my ſoul in hel, nor giue thy Holy one to ſee corruption.

28 Thou haſt made knovven to me the vvaies of life: thou ſhalt make me ful of ioyfulnes vvith thy face.

29 Ye men, brethren, let me boldly ſpeake to you of the Patriarch Dauid: that * he died, and vvas buried: and his ſepulchre is vvith vs vntil this preſent day.

30 Vvhereas therfore he vvas a Prophet, and knevv that by an othe God had ſvvorne to him that of the fruite of his loynes there ſhould ſit vpon his ſeate:

31 forſeeing he ſpake of the reſurrection of Chriſt, for neither vvas he left in hel, neither did his fleſh ſee corruption.

32 This IESVS hath God raiſed againe, vvhereof al vve are vvitneſſes.

33 Being exalted therfore by the right hand of God, and hauing receiued of his father the promiſſe of the holy Ghoſt, he hath povvred out this vvhom' you ſee and heare.

34 For Dauid aſcended not into heauen: but he ſaith, Our Lord hath ſaid to my Lord, ſit on my right hand,

35 vntil I make thine enemies the footeſtoole of thy feete.

36 Therfore let al the houſe of Iſraël know moſt certainly that God hath made him both Lord, and CHRIST, this IESVS, vvhom you haue crucified.

37 And hearing theſe things, they were compuncte in hart, and ſaid to Peter and to the reſt of the Apoſtles, Vvhat ſhal vve doe men, brethren?

38 But Peter ſaid to them, Doe penance, and be euery one of you baptized in the name of IESVS CHRIST for remiſſion of your ſinnes: and you ſhal receiue the gift of the holy Ghoſt.

39 For to you is the promiſſe, and to your children, and to al that are farre of, vvhomſoeuer the Lord our God ſhal call.

40 Vvith very many other vvordes alſo did he teſtifie, and exhorted them, ſaying, Saue your ſelues from this peruerſe generation.

41 They therfore that receiued his vvord, vvere baptized: and there vvere added in that day about three thouſand ſoules.

42 And they vvere perſeuéring in the doctrine of the Apoſtles, and in the communication of the breaking of bread, and praiers.

43 And feare came vpon euery ſoul: many vvonders alſo and ſignes vvere done by the Apoſtles in Hieruſalem, and there vvas great feare in al.

44 Al they alſo that beleeued, vvere together, * and had ″ al things cōmon.

45 Their poſſeſſions and ſubſtance they ſold, and deuided them to al, according as euery one had neede.

46 Daily alſo continuing vvith one accord in the temple, and breaking bread from houſe to houſe, they tooke their meate vvith ioy and ſimplicitie of hart:

47 praiſing God, and hauing grace vvith al the people. And our Lord ″ increaſed them that ſhould be ſaued, daily together.

Marginal notes to Chapter 2

Argument The 2 part.
Argument THE comming of the Holy Ghoſt and beginning of the Church in Hieruſalem.
v. 1 Act. 1, 4▪
v. 1 The Epiſtle vpō whitſunday.
v. 3 Mt. 3, 11.
v. 4 Io. 7, 39.
v. 8 ` do v⟨illegible⟩e heare▪
v. 11 ` do heare▪
v. 14 ᵃ The leſſon before the Epiſtle on Imber weneſday in whitſonweeke.
v. 14 ⸬ Peter the head of the reſt and now newly repleniſhed with al knowledge and fortitude, maketh the firſt Sermon.
v. 16 Ioël. 2▪ 28.
v. 25 Pſ. 15, 8.
v. 27 ⸬ Who but an infidel (ſaith S. Auguſtine) wil deny Chriſt to haue deſcended to Hel? ep. 99.
v. 27 ⸬ As his ſoul ſuffered no paines in Hel, ſo neither did his body take any corruptiō in the graue.
v. 29 3. Reg. 2, 10.
v. 30 Pſ. 131, 11.
v. 33 ` this gift vvhich Pſ. 109, 1▪
v. 37 Contrition.
v. 38 ⸬ Not onely amendment of life, but penāce alſo required be fore Baptiſme, in ſuch as be of age, though no⟨illegible⟩ in that ſort as aftervvard in the Sacramēt of penance. Aug. de fid. et oper. c. 11. ⟨illegible⟩ ep. 108.
v. 41 ⸬ Three thouſand were conuerted at this firſt ſermon, ⟨illegible⟩ they were put to the other viſible companio and Church.
v. 42 ᶜ This was the B. Sacrament, which the Apoſtles daily miniſtred to the Chriſtians at leaſt in one kinde. See chap. 20, 7.
v. 44 Act. 4, 32.

Annotations to Chapter 2

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. II.

1. The daies of Pentecoſt.) As Chriſt our Paſche, for correſpondence to the figure, was offered at the Iewes great feaſt of Paſche, ſo fifty daies after (in Greeke, Pentecoſt) for accompliſhing the like▪ figure of the Law-giuing in Mount Sinal, he ſent downe the Holy Ghoſt iuſt on the day of their Pentecoſt, which was alwaies on Sunday, as appeareth Leuit. 23, 15. Both which daies the Church keepeth yerely for memorie of Chriſts death and Reſurrection, and the ſending downe of the Holy Ghoſt: as they did the like for record of their deliuerie out of Aegypt, and their Law giuing aforeſaid, the ſaid Feaſtes with vs conteining, beſides the remembrance of benefites paſt, great Sacraments alſo of the life to come. Aug. ep. 119, C. 16. [Margin: The feaſtes of Paſche & Pentecoſt.]

4. Al repleniſhed.) Though the Apoſtles and the reſt were baptized before, and had thereby receiued the grace of the Holy Ghoſt to ſanctification and remiſſion of ſinnes, as for diuers other purpoſes alſo: Yet as Chriſt * promiſed them they ſhould be further indued with ſtrength and vertue from aboue, ſo here he fulfilleth his promes, viſibly powring downe the Holy Ghoſt vpon al the companie and vpon euery one of them, thereby repleniſhing the Apoſtles ſpecially with al truth, wiſedom, and knowledge neceſſarie for the gouernement of the Church, and giuing both to them and to al other preſent, the grace and effect of the Sacrament of Confirmation, accompliſhing, corroborating, and ſtrengthening them in their ſaith and the confeſſion of the ſame. And laſtly for a viſible token of Gods Spirit, he endued them al with the gift of diuers ſtrange tonges: al (I ſay) there preſent, as wel our Ladie, as other holy women and brethren, beſides the Apoſtles. though ⟨illegible⟩ the Heretikes fondly argue, for the deſire they haue to diſhonour Chriſts mother, that neither ſhe nor they were there preſent, nor had the gift of tongues, contrarie to the plaine text that ſaith, They vvere al together, to wit, al the 120 mentioned before c. 1. 15. [Margin: The ſending of the Holy Ghoſt on whitſunday and the effectes thereof. · Lu. 24, 49▪ · Our B. Ladie. · Beza Annot. in hoc ⟨illegible⟩ v. 1.]

23. By the determinate counſel of God deliuered.) God deliuered him, and he deliuered him ſelf, for loue and intention of our ſaluation, and ſo the acte was holy and Gods owne determination. But the Iewes and others which betraied and crucified him, did it of malice and wicked purpoſe, and their facte was damnable, and not of Gods counſel or cauſing: though he tolerated it, for that he could and did turne their abominable facte to the good of our ſaluatiō. Therfore abhorre thoſe new Manichees of our time, both Lutherans and Caluiniſts, that make God the author and cauſe of Iudas betraying of Chriſt, no leſſe then of Paules conuerſion beſide the falſe tranſlation of Beza, ſaying for Gods preſcience or foreknowledge (in the Greeke, ⟨non-Latin script⟩) Gods prouidence. [Margin: Gods determination that Chriſt ſhould die, excuſeth not the Iewes. · B⟨illegible⟩za.]

24. Looſing the ſorovves.) Chriſt was not in paines him ſelf, but looſed other men of thoſe dolours of Hel, wherewith it was impoſſible him ſelf ſhould be touched. See S. Auguſtine. [Margin: * Li. 12▪ c. 13▪ de Gen. ⟨illegible⟩.]

27. My ſoul in Hel.) Where al the Faithful, according to the Creede, euer haue beleeued, that Chriſt according to his ſoul, went downe to Hel, to deliuer the Patriarches and al iuſt men there holden in bondage til his death, and the Apoſtle here citing the Prophets wordes, moſt euidently expreſſeth the ſame, diſtinguiſhing his ſoule in Hel, from his body in the graue: Yet the Caluiniſts to defend againſt Gods expreſſe wordes, the blaſphemie of their Maiſter, that Chriſt ſuffered the paines of Hel, and that no where but vpon the Croſſe, and that otherwiſe he deſcended not into Hel, moſt falſely and flatly here corrupt the text, by turning and wreſting both the Hebrew and Greeke wordes from their moſt proper and vſual ſignifications of, Soule, and Hel, into body, and graue: ſaying for, my ſoule in Hel, thus, my body, life; perſon, yea (as Beza in his new Teſtament an. 1556) my carcas in the graue, and this later they corrupt almoſt through out the Bible for that purpoſe. But for refelling of both corruptions, it ſhal be ſufficient in this place: firſt, that al Hebrues & Greekes, and al that vnderſtand theſe tonges, know that the foreſaid Hebrue & Greeke wordes are as proper, peculiar, and vſual to ſignifie, ſoul and Hel, as anima and infernus in Latin, yea as ſoul and Hel in Engliſh do properly ſignifie the ſoule of man, and Hel that is oppoſite to heauen: and that they are as vnproprely vſed to ſignifie body and graue, as to ſay in Engliſh, ſoul for body, or Hel for graue, Secondly, it doth ſo mi⟨illegible⟩like the Heretikes them ſelues, that Caſtaleo one of their fine Tranſlatours reſelleth it, and to make it the more ſure, he for, in inferno, tranſlateth, in Orco. that is, in Hel. Thirdly, Beza him ſelf partly recanteth in his later edition, and confeſſeth that, Carcas, was no fit word for the body of Chriſt, and therfore, I have (ſaith he) changed it, but I reteine and keepe the ſa⟨illegible⟩e ſenſe ſtil. meaning that he hath now tranſlated it, ſoule, but that he meaneth thereby as before, Chriſts dead body, fourthly, he ſaith plainely, that tranſlating thus, Thou ſhalt not leaue my carcas in the graue, he did it of purpoſe againſt Limbus Patrum, Purgatorie, and Chriſts deſcending into Hel, which he calleth ſoul errours, and marueleth, that moſt of the ancient fathers vvere in that errour: namely of Chriſts deſcending into Hel, and deliuering the old fathers. Vvhat neede we more▪ He oppoſeth himſelf both againſt plaine Scriptures and al auncient fathers, peruerting the one, and contemning the other, to ouerthrow that truth which is an Article of our Crede. whereby it is euidently falſe which ſome of them ſay for their defenſe, that none of them did euer of purpoſe tranſlate falſely. See the Annotation vpon 1 Pet. 3. v. 19. [Margin: Corrupt tranſlation againſt the Article of Chriſts deſcending into Hel. · ⟨non-Latin script⟩ · * Eng. Bible. ⟨illegible⟩ · * No. Teſt. an. 1556. annot. in 2 Act. v▪ 27▪ & 24. & in 1 Pet. ⟨illegible⟩, 19.]

44. Al things common.) This liuing in common is not a rule or a precept to al Chriſtian men, as the Anabaptiſtes falſely pretend: but a life of perfection and counſel, folowed of our Religious in the Catholike Church. See S. Aug. in Pſ. 1⟨illegible⟩2. in principio. & ep. 109. [Margin: Liuing in common.]

47. Increaſed.) Moe and moe were added to the Church (as the Greeke more plainely expreſſeth) that we may ſee the viſible propagation & increaſe of the ſame. from which time a diligent man may deduce the very ſame viſible Societie of men ioyned in Chriſt, through the whole booke, and afterward by the Eccleſiaſtical ſtorie, downe til our daies, againſt the pretenſed inuiſible Church of the Heretikes. [Margin: The increaſe & perpetuitie of the VISIBLE CHV⟨illegible⟩H. · ⟨non-Latin script⟩.]

Chapter 3

A miracle, and a Sermon of Peters to the people, ſhevving that I⟨illegible⟩SVS is Chriſt, and exhorting them to faith in him and penance for their ſinnes, and ſo they ſhal haue by him (in Baptiſme) the Benediction which was promiſed to Abraham.

1 AND Peter and Iohn vvent vp into the temple, at the ninthe houre of praier.

2 And a certaine man that vvas lame from his mothers vvombe, vvas caried: vvhom they laid euery day at the gate of the temple, that is called Specious, that he might aſke almes of them that vvent into the temple.

3 He, vvhen he had ſeen Peter and Iohn about to enter into the temple, aſked to receiue an almes.

4 But Peter vvith Iohn looking vpon him, ſaid, Looke vpon vs.

5 But he looked earneſtly vpon them, hoping that he ſhould receiue ſome thing of them.

6 But Peter ſaid, Siluer and gold I haue not, but ″ that vvhich I haue, the ſame I giue to thee: In the name of IESVS CHRIST of Nazareth ariſe, and vvalke.

7 And taking his right hand, he lifted him vp, and forthvvith his feete and ſoles vvere made ſtrong.

8 And ſpringing he ſtoode, and vvalked: and vvent in vvith them into the temple vvalking, and leaping, and praiſing God.

9 And al the people ſavv him vvalking and praiſing God.

10 And they knevv him, that, it vvas he vvhich ſate for almes at the Specious gate of the temple: and they vvere excedingly aſtonied and agaſt at that had chaūced to him.

11 And as he held Peter and Iohn, al the people ranne to them vnto the porche vvhich is called Salomons, vvondering.

12 But Peter ſeing them, made anſvver to the people, Ye men of Iſraël, vvhy maruel you at this, or vvhy looke you vpon vs, as though ″ by our povver or holines vve haue made this man to vvalke?

13 The God of Abraham, and the God of Iſaac, and the God of Iacob, the God of our fathers hath glorified his ſonne IESVS, vvhom you in deede deliuered and denied before the face of Pilate, he iudging him to be releaſed.

14 But you denied the holy and the iuſt one, * and aſked a mankiller to be giuen vnto you.

15 but the authour of life you killed, vvhom God hath raiſed from the dead, of vvhich vve are vvitneſſes.

16 And in the faith of his name, this man vvhom you ſee and knovv, his name hath ſtrengthened: & the faith vvhich is by him, hath giuen this perfect health in the ſight of al you.

17 And novv (brethren) I knovv that you did it through ignorāce, as alſo your princes.

18 But God vvho foreſhevved by the mouth of al the prophets, that his CHRIST ſhould ſuffer, hath ſo fulfilled it.

19 Be Penitent therfore & conuert, that your ſinnes may be put out. ⊢

20 that, vvhen the times ſhal come of refreſhing by the ſight of our Lord, and he ſhal ſend him that hath been preached vnto you IESVS CHRIST,

21 vvhom heauen truely muſt receiue vntil the times of the reſtitution of al things, vvhich God ſpake by the mouth of his holy prophets from the beginnīg of the world.

22 Moyſes in deede ſaid, That a prophet ſhal the Lord your God raiſe vp to you of your brethren, as my ſelf: him you ſhal heare according to al things vvhatſoeuer he ſhal ſpeake to you.

23 And it ſhal be, euery ſoule that ſhal not heare that prophet, ſhal be deſtroied out of the people.

24 And al the Prophets from Samuël and aftervvard that haue ſpoken, told of theſe daies.

25 You are the children of the Prophets and of the teſtament vvhich God made to our fathers, ſaying to Abraham, And in thy ſeede ſhal al the families of the earth be bleſſed.

26 To you firſt God raiſing vp his ſonne, hath ſent him bleſſing you: that euery one ſhould conuert him ſelf from his naughtines.

Marginal notes to Chapter 3

Argument The Epiſtle vpō SS. Peter and Paules eue. Iun. 28.
v. 1 ⸬ This maketh for diſtinction of Canonical houres and diuerſitie of appointed times to pray in Se⟨illegible⟩ Anno⟨illegible⟩. ⟨illegible⟩.
v. 12 The Epiſtle vpō weneſday in Eaſter weeke.
v. 13 Luc. 23, 28.
v. 16 ⸬ This faith was not the faith of the ſame man (for he looked onely for almes) nor a ſpecial faith of the Apoſtles owne ſaluatiō: but the whole beleefe of Chriſtian Religion.
v. 21 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 21 ⸬ Some Heretikes fouly corrupt this place, thus, Who muſt be conteined in heauen, of purpoſe (as they proteſt) to hold Chriſt in heauē, from the B. Sacramēt. Beza. As though his preſēce there, drew him out of heauen. Neither cā they pretend the Greeke, which is word for word as in the vulgar latin, and as we tranſlate.
v. 22 Deu. 18, 15.
v. 25 Gen. 22, 18. 26, 4▪

Annotations to Chapter 3

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. III.

⟨illegible⟩. That vvhich I haue.] This power of working miracles vvas in Peter, and Peter properly did giue this man his health, though he receiued that force and vertue of God, and in & by him executed the ſame. Therfore he ſaith, That vvhich I haue, I giue to thee. and the Heretikes are ridiculous that note here, a miracle done by Chriſt by the handes of the Apoſtles, to make the ſimple beleeue that they had no more to doe then a dead inſtrument in the workemans hand. [Margin: Saincts doe miracles and the like, but by the power of God.]

12. By our povver.] When the Apoſtles remit ſinnes, or doe any other miracles, they doe it not by any humane, proper, or natural power in them ſelues: but of ſupernatural force giuen them from aboue, to proue that the faith of Chriſt is true, and that he is God whom the Iewes crucified, in whoſe name and faith they worke, and not in their owne.

Chapter 4

The Rulers of the Ievves oppoſe them ſelues and impriſon Peter and Iohn. 4 But yet thouſands of the people are conuerted: 5 and to the Rulers alſo, Peter boldly auoucheth by the forſaid miracle, that IESVS is Chriſt, telling them of their heinous fault out of the Pſalmes, and that vvithout him they can not be ſaued. 13 They though confounded vvith the miracle, yet procede in their obſtinacie, forbidding them to ſpeake any more of IESVS, adding alſo threates. 23 Wherevpon the Church fleeth to praier, vvherein they comfort them ſelues vvith the omnipotencie of God, and prediction of Dauid, and aſke for the gift of boldnes and miracles againſt thoſe threates. 31 And God ſheweth miraculouſly that he hath heard their praier. ⟨illegible⟩2 The vvhole Churches vnitie and communitie of life. 36. Of Barnabas by name.

1 AND vvhen they vvere ſpeaking to the people, the Prieſts and magiſtrates of the temple and the Sadducees came vpon them,

2 being greeued that they taught the people, and ſhevved in IESVS the reſurrection from the dead:

3 and they laid handes vpon them, and put them into vvard, vntil the morovv, for it vvas novv euening.

4 And many of them that had heard the vvord, beleeued: and the number of the men vvas made fiue thouſand.

5 And it came to paſſe on the morovv, that their princes, and Auncients, and Scribes vvere gathered into Hieruſalem.

6 and Annas the high prieſt, and Caiphas and Iohn, and Alexander, and as many as vvere of the prieſts ſtocke.

7 And ſetting them in the middes, they aſked: In vvhat povver or in vvhat name haue you done this?

8 Then Peter repleniſhed vvith the holy Ghoſt, ſaid to them, Ye princes of the people & Auncients:

9 If vve this day be examined for a good deede vpon an impotent man, in vvhat he hath been made whole,

10 be it knovven to al you and to al the people of Iſraël, that in the name of IESVS CHRIST of Nazareth, vvhom you did crucifie, vvhom God hath raiſed from the dead, in this ſame this man ſtandeth before you vvhole.

11 This is the ſtone that vvas reiected of you the builders: vvhich is made into the head of the corner.

12 and there is not ſaluation in any other. for neither is there any other name vnder heauen giuen to men, vvherein vve muſt be ſaued.

13 And ſeeing Peters conſtancie and Iohns, vnderſtanding that they vvere men vnlettered, and of the vulgar ſort, they marueled, and they knew them that they had been vvith IESVS:

14 ſeeing the man alſo that had been cured, ſtanding vvith them, they could ſay nothing to the contrarie.

15 But they commaunded them to goe aſide forth out of the councel: and they conferred together,

16 ſaying, Vvhat ſhal vve doe to theſe men? for a notorious ſigne in deede hath been done by them, to al the inhabitants of Hieruſalem: it is manifeſt, and vve can not denie it.

17 But that it be no further ſpred abrode among the people, let vs threaten them, that they ſpeake no more in this name to any man.

18 And calling them, they charged them that they ſhould not ſpeake at al, nor teache in the name of IESVS.

19 But Peter and Iohn anſvvering, ſaid to them, If it be iuſt in the ſight of God, to heare you rather then God, iudge ye.

20 for vve can not but ſpeake the things vvhich vve haue ſeen and heard.

21 But they threatening, dimiſſed them: not finding hovv they might puniſh them, for the people, becauſe all glorified that vvhich had been done, in that vvhich vvas chaunced.

22 For the man vvas more then fourtie yeres old in vvhom that ſigne of health had been vvrought.

23 And being dimiſſed they came to theirs, and ſhevved al that the cheefe prieſts and Aucients had ſaid to them.

24 Vvho hauing heard it, with one accord lifted vp their voice to God, and ſaid, Lord, thou that didſt make heauen & earth, the ſea, and al things that are in them,

25 vvho in the holy Ghoſt by the mouth of our father Dauid thy ſeruāt haſt ſaid, Vvhy did the Gentiles rage, and the people meditate vaine thinges:

26 the kings of the earth ſtand vp, and the princes aſſemble together againſt our Lord, and againſt his CHRIST?

27 For there aſſembled in deede in this citie againſt thy holy childe IESVS vvhom thou haſt anointed, Herod, and Pontius Pilate, vvith the Gentiles and the people of Iſraël,

28 to doe vvhat thy hand & thy counſel decreed to be done.

29 And novv Lord looke vpon their threatenings, and giue vnto thy ſeruants vvith al confidence to ſpeake thy vvorde,

30 in that, that thou extend thy hand to cures and ſignes and vvonders to be done by the name of thy holy ſonne IESVS.

31 And vvhen they had praied, the palce vvas moued vvherein they vvere gathered: and they vvere al repleniſhed vvith the holy Ghoſt, and they ſpake the vvord of God vvith confidence.

32 And the multitude of beleeuers had one hart and one ſoule: neither did any one ſay that ought vvas his ovvne of thoſe things vvhich he poſſeſſed, but al things vvere common vnto them.

33 And vvith great povver did the Apoſtles giue teſtimonie of the reſurrection of IESVS CHRIST our Lord: and great grace vvas in al them.

34 For neither vvas there any one needie among them. For as many as vvere ovvners of landes or houſes, ſold and brought the prices of thoſe things vvhich they ſold,

35 and laid it before the feete of the Apoſtles. And to euery one vvas deuided according as euery one hade neede.

36 And Ioſeph vvho vvas ſurnamed of the Apoſtles Barnabas (vvhich is by interpretation, the ſonne of conſolation) a Leuite, a Cyprian borne,

37 vvhereas he had a peece of land, ſold it, and brought the price, and laid it ″ before the feete of the Apoſtles.

Marginal notes to Chapter 4

v. 4 ⸬ Here againe we ſee the proceding and increaſe of the Church viſibly.
v. 10 The name of IESVS. See Annot. Philip. 2, 10.
v. 10 Pſa. 117, 22.
v. 13 The Apoſtles conſtancie, learning and wiſdom after the cōming of the Holy Ghoſt, being but idiotes, that is, ſimple vnlettered men and timorous before.
v. 19 ⸬ Their cōſtancie and courage after their confirmation, being ſo weake before. And if any Magiſtrate cōmaund againſt God, that is to ſay, forbid Catholike Chriſtiā men to preach or ſerue God, this ſame muſt be their anſwer, though they be whipped and killed for their labour. See c. 5. v. 29.
v. 25 Pſ. 2, 1.
v. 28 ⸬ Chriſtes death, as needeful for mans redemption, was of Gods determination: but as of the malice of the Iewes, it was not his act otherwiſe then by permiſſion.
v. 32 Act. 2, 44.
v. 34 ⸬ Note the ardent charitie and cōtempt of worldly things in the firſt Chriſtians: who did not onely giue great almes, but ſold al their lands to beſtow on the Apoſtles and the reſt that were in neceſſitie, according to Chriſtes coūſel. Mt. 16, 21. Note alſo the great honour & credit giuen to the Apoſtles, in that the Chriſtian men put al the goods & poſſeſſions they had, to their diſpoſition.

Annotations to Chapter 4

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. IIII.

37. Before the feete.) He, as the reſt, did not onely giue his goods as in vulgar almes, but in al humble and reuerent maner as things dedicated to God, he laid them downe at the Apoſtles holy feete, as S. Luke alwaies expreſſeth, and gaue them not into their handes. The Sunamite fel downe and embraced Eliſaeus feete. Many that aſked benefites of Chriſt (as the woman ſicke of the bloudy fiuxe) fel downe at his feete and Ma⟨illegible⟩ie kiſſed his feete. Such are ſignes of due reuerence done both to Chriſt and to other ſacred perſons, either Prophetes, Apoſtles, Popes, or others repreſenting his perſon in earth. See in S. Hierom of Epiphanius Biſhop in Cypres, how the people of Hieruſalem of al ſortes flocked together vnto him, offering their children (to take his bleſſing) kiſsing his feete, plucking the hemme⟨illegible⟩ of his garment, ſo that he could not moue for the throng. Ep. ⟨illegible⟩1 c. 4 cont. e⟨illegible⟩o. Io. Hieroſol. [Margin: Reuerence to holy perſons. · 4. reg. 4, ⟨illegible⟩ ▪ · Luc. ⟨illegible⟩, 47. · Kiſſing their feete. · Lu. 7, 38.]

Chapter 5

Ananias and his vvife Saphîra, for their ſacrilege, at Peters word fall downe dead, to the great terrour of the reſt. 12 By the Apoſtles miracles, not onely the number, but alſo their faith ſo increaſeth, that they ſeeke in the ſtreate⟨illegible⟩ to the very ſhadow of Peter, the townes alſo about bringing their diſeaſed to Hieruſalem. 17 The Rulers againe oppoſe them ſelues, but in vaine. 19 For out of priſon an Angel deliuereth them, bidding them preach openly to al: 27 and in their Councel Peter is nothing afraid of their bigge wordes: 34 Yea Gamaliel being one of them ſelues caſ⟨illegible⟩eth a doubt among them, leſt the matter be of God, and therfore impoſsible to be diſſolued. 40 Finally, the Apoſtles being ſcourged by them, count it an honour, and ceaſe no day from preaching.

1 BVT a certaine man named Ananias, vvith Saphîra his vvife ſold a peece of land,

2 and ″ defrauded of the price of the land, his vvife being priuie thereto: and bringing a certaine portion, laide it at the feete of the Apoſtles.

3 And ″ Peter ſaid, Ananias, vvhy hath Satan tempted thy hart, that thou ſhouldeſt lie to the holy Ghoſt, and defraude of the price of the land?

4 Remaining, did it not remaine to thee: and being ſold, vvas it not ″ in thy povver? Vvhy haſt thou put this thing in thy hart? Thou haſt not lied ″ to men, but to God.

5 And Ananias hearing theſe vvordes, fel dovvne, and gaue vp the ghoſt. And there came great feare vpon al that heard it.

6 And yong men riſing vp, remoued him, and bearing him forth buried him.

7 And it vvas the ſpace as it vvere of three houres, and his vvife, not knovving vvhat vvas chaunced, came in.

8 And Peter anſvvered her, Tel me vvoman, vvhether did you ſel the land for ſo much? But ſhe ſaid, Yea, for ſo much.

9 And Peter vnto her, Vvhy haue you agreed together to tempt the Spirit of our Lord? Behold, their feete that haue buried thy huſband, at the doore, and they ſhal beare thee forth.

10 Forthvvith ſhe fel before his feete, and gaue vp the ghoſt. And the yong men going in, found her dead: and caried her forth, and buried her by her huſband.

11 And there fel great feare in the vvhole Church, and vpon al that heard theſe things.

12 And by the handes of the Apoſtles vvere many ſignes and vvonders done among the people. And they vvere al vvith one accord in Salomons porche.

13 But of the reſt none durſt ioyne them ſelues vnto them: but the people magnified them.

14 And the multitude of men and vvomen that beleeued in our Lord, vvas more increaſed:

15 ſo that they did bring forth the ſicke into the ſtreates, and laid them in beddes and couches, that vvhen Peter came, ″ his ſhadovv at the leaſt might ouer ſhadovv any of them, and they all might be deliuered from their infirmities.

16 And there ranne together vnto Hieruſalem the multitude alſo of the cities ad⟨illegible⟩oyning, bringing ſicke perſons and ſuch as vvere vexed of vncleane ſpirits: vvho vvere al cured. ⊢

17 And the high prieſt riſing vp, and al that vvere vvith him, vvhich is the hereſie of the Sadduces, vvere repleniſhed vvith zeale:

18 laid hands vpon the Apoſtles, and put them in the common priſon.

19 But an Angel of our Lord by night opening the gates of the priſon, & leading them forth, ſaid,

20 Goe: and ſtanding ſpeake in the temple to the people al the vvordes of this life.

21 Vvho hauing heard this, early in the morning entred into the temple, and taught. And the high prieſt comming, and they that vvere vvith him, called together the Councel & al the auncients of the children of Iſraël: and they ſent to the priſon that they might be brought.

22 But vvhen the miniſters vvere come, and opening the priſon, found them not: returning they told,

23 ſaying, The priſon truely vve found ſhut vvith al diligence, and the keepers ſtanding before the gates: but opening it, vve found no man vvithin.

24 And as ſoone as the Magiſtrate of the temple and the cheefe prieſts heard theſe vvordes, they vvere in doubt of them, vvhat vvould befall.

25 And there came a certaine man and told them, That the men, loe, vvhich you did put in priſon, are in the temple ſtanding, and teaching the people.

26 Then vvent the Magiſtrate vvith the miniſters, and brought them vvithout force, for they feared the people leſt they ſhould be ſtoned.

27 And vvhen they had brought them, they ſet them in the Councel. And the high prieſt aſked them,

28 ſaying, * Commaunding vve commaunded you that you ſhould not teach in this name: and behold you haue filled Hieruſalem vvith your doctrine, and you vvil bring vpon vs the bloud of this man.

29 But Peter anſvvering and the Apoſtles, ſaid, God muſt be obeied, rather then men.

30 The God of our Fathers hath raiſed vp IESVS, vvhom you did kil, hanging him vpon a tree.

31 This Prince and Sauiour God hath exalted vvith his right hand, to giue repentance to Iſraël, and remiſſion of ſinnes.

32 and vve are vvitneſſes of theſe vvordes, and the holy Ghoſt, vvhom God hath giuen to al that obey him.

33 Vvhen they had heard theſe things, it cut them to the hart, and they conſulted to kil them.

34 But one in the Councel riſing vp, a Phariſee named Gamaliel, a doctor of lavv honorable to al the people, commaunded the men to be put forth a vvhile.

35 and he ſaid to them, Ye men of Iſraël, take heede to your ſelues touching theſe men vvhat you meane to doe.

36 For before theſe daies there roſe Theódas, ſaying he vvas ſome body, to vvhom conſented a numbre of men about foure hundred, vvho vvas ſlaine: and al that beleeued him, vvere diſperſed, and brought to nothing.

37 After this fellovv there roſe Iudas of Galilee in the daies of the Enrolling, and drevv avvay the people after him, and he periſhed: and as many as euer conſented to him, vvere diſperſed.

38 And novv therfore I ſay to you, depart from theſe men and let them alone: for if this counſel or vvorke be of men, it vvil be diſſolued:

39 but if it be of God, you are not able to diſſolue them', leſt perhaps you be found to reſiſt God alſo. And they conſented to him.

40 And calling in the Apoſtles, after they had ſcourged them, they charged them that they ſhould not ſpeake in the name of IESVS, and dimiſſed them.

41 And they vvent from the ſight of the councel reioycing, becauſe they vvere accounted vvorthy to ſuffer reproche for the name of IESVS.

42 And euery day they ceaſed not in the temple and from houſe to houſe to teach and euangelize Chriſt IESVS.

Marginal notes to Chapter 5

v. 11 ⸬ Herevpon roſe great reuerence, awe, and feare of the vulgar Chriſtians toward the holy Apoſtles, for an example to al Chriſtian people how to behaue thē ſelues toward their Biſhops and Prieſts.
v. 11 The Epiſtle vpō Imber weneſday in whitſon-weeke. And within the octaue, & in a votiue of SS. Peter and Paul.
v. 15 Peters ſhadow.
v. 19 An Angel leadeth them out of priſon.
v. 27 Act. 4, 18.
v. 36 Theudas▪
v. 39 ⸬ Time, and the euident ſucceſſe of Chriſtes Church and religion, proue it to be of God: no violence of the Iewes, no perſecution of the Heathen Princes, no endeuour of domeſtical Aduerſaries, heretikes, Schiſmatikes, or il liuers, p⟨illegible⟩uailīg againſt it, as on the other ſide, many attempts haue been made by Arius Macedonius, Neſtorius, Luther, & the like, who thought them ſelues ſome body: but after they had plai⟨illegible⟩d their partes a while, their memory is buried, or liueth only in maledictiō & infamie, & their ſcholers come to naught Therfore let no Cath. man be ſcandalized that this hereſie holdeth vp for a time. For the Arians & ſome others ⟨illegible⟩loriſhed much lōger thē theſe, and were better ſupported by Princes and learning, & yet had an end.
v. 39 ` it,

Annotations to Chapter 5

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. V.

2. Defrauded.) In that (ſaith S. Auguſtine) he withdrew any part of that which he promiſed, he was guilty at once, both of ſacrilege, and of fraude, of ſacrilege, becauſe he robbed God of that which was his by promes: of fraude, in that he withheld of the whole gift, a peece. Let now the Heretikes come, and ſay it was for lying or hypocriſie onely that this facte was condemned: becauſe they be loth to haue ſacrilege counted any ſuch ſinne, who haue taught men not onely to take away from God ſome peece of that or al that them ſelues gaue, but plainly to ſpoile & apply to them ſelues al that other men gaue. [Margin: Aug. ſer. 9 in append. de diuerſis tom. 10. · Sacrilege.]

3. Peter ſaid.) S. Peter (as you ſee here) without mans relation knew this fraude and the cogitations of Ananias, and as head of the College and of the whole Church againſt which this robbery was committed, executed this heauy ſentence of Excommunication both againſt him, and his wife conſenting to the Sacrilege. ⟨illegible⟩ it was excommunication by S. Auguſtines judgement, (li. 5. cont. ep. Parm. c. 1 to. 7) and had this corporal miraculous death ioyned withal, as the Excommunication that S. Paul gaue out againſt the inceſtuous and others, had the corporal vexation of Satan incident vnto it. [Margin: Excōmunicatiō ioyned vvith corporal painer. · 1 Cor. 5.]

4. In thy povver.) If is diſpleaſed God (ſaith S. Auguſtine) to vvithdravv of the money vvhich they had vovved to God, hovv is he angry vvhen chaſtitie is vovved and is not performed? for to ſuch may be ſaid that vvhich S. Peter ſaid of the money: Thy virginitie remaining did it not remaine to thee, and before thou didſt vovv, vvas it not in thine ovvne power? for, whoſoeuer haue vowed ſuch things and haue not paied them, let them not thinke to be condemned to corporal deaths, but to euerlaſting fire. Auguſt. Ser. 10. de diuerſis. And S. Gregorie to the ſame purpoſe writeth thus, Ananias had vovved money to God, vvhich aftervvard ouercome vvith diueliſh perſuaſion he vvithdravv: but vvith vvha⟨illegible⟩ death he vvas puniſhed, thou knovveſt. If then he vvere vvorthy of that death, who tooke avvay the money that he had giuen to God, conſider vvhat great peril in Gods iudgment thou ſhalt be vvorthy of, vvhich haſt vvithdravven, not money, but thy ſelf from almighty God, to vvhom thou hadſt vovved thy ſelf vnder the habits or vveede of a Monke. [Margin: Vow of Chaſtitie, & the breache thereof. · Greg. li. ⟨illegible⟩. ep. 13.]

4. Not to men, but) To take from the Church or from the Gouernours thereof, things dedicated to their vſe and the ſeruice of God, or to lie vnto Gods Miniſters, is ſo iudged of before God, as if the lie were made, and the fraude done to the Holy Ghoſt him ſelf, who is the Churches Preſident and Protector.

15. His ſhadovv.) Specially they ſought to Peter the cheefe of al, who not onely by touching, as the other, but by his very ſhadow cured al diſeaſes, wherevpon S. Auguſtine faith, If then the ſhadow of his body could helpe, how much more now the fulnes of power? And if thē a certaine litle vvind of him paſſing by did profite them that humbly aſked, how much more the grace of him now being permanent & remaining? Ser. 29 de Sanctis, ſpeaking of the miracles done by the Saincts now reigning in heauen. [Margin: Peters ſhadow & interceſſion.]

Chapter 6

By occaſion of a murmur in the Church (vvhoſe number novv is ſo grovven that it can not be numbred) Seuen of them being ordered by the Apoſtles in the holy order of Deacons: ⟨illegible⟩ one of them, Steuen, worketh great miracles: and is by ſuch as he confounded in diſputation, falſely accuſed in the Councel, of blaſphemie againſt the Temple and rites thereof.

1 AND in thoſe daies the numbre of diſciples increaſing, there aroſe a ″ murmuring of the Greekes againſt the Hebrues, for that their vvidovves vvere deſpiſed in the daily miniſterie.

2 And the Tvvelue calling together the multitude of the diſciples, ſaid, It is not reaſon, that vve leaue the vvord of God, and ſerue tables.

3 Conſider therfore brethren, ″ ſeuen men of you of good teſtimonie, ful of the holy Ghoſt and vviſedom, vvhom vve may appoint ouer this buſines.

4 But vve vvil be inſtant in praier and the miniſterie of the vvord.

5 And the ſaying vvas liked before al the multitude. And they choſe Steuen a man ful of faith and of the holy Ghoſt, and Philippe, and Próchorus, and Nicánor, and Timon, and Pármenas, and Nicolas a ſtranger of Antioche.

6 Theſe they did ſet in the preſence of the Apoſtles: and praying they impoſed handes vpon them.

7 And the vvord of God increaſed, and the number of the diſciples vvas multiplied in Hieruſalem excedingly: a great multitude alſo of the prieſts obeied the faith.

8 And Steuen ful of grace and fortitude did great vvonders & ſignes among the people.

9 And there aroſe certaine of that vvhich is called the Synagogue of the Libertines, and of the Cyrenians, and of the Alexandrians, and of them that vvere of Cilicia and Aſia, diſputing vvith Steuen:

10 and they could not reſiſt the vviſedom and the Spirit that ſpake.

11 Then they ſuborned men, to ſay they had heard him ſpeake vvordes of blaſphemie againſt Moyſes and God.

12 They therfore ſtirred vp the people, and the Auncients, and the Scribes: and running together they tooke him, and brought him into the Councel,

13 and they ſet falſe vvitneſſes that ſaid, This man ceaſeth not to ſpeake vvordes againſt the holy place and the Lavv.

14 for vve haue heard him ſay, that this ſame IESVS of Nazareth ſhal deſtroy this place, and ſhal change the traditions, vvhich Moyſes deliuered vnto vs.

15 And al that ſate in the Councel beholding him, ſavv his face as it vvere the face of an Angel.

Marginal notes to Chapter 6

v. 4 The election of the 7 firſt Deacons.
v. 5 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 7 ⸬ Now alſo the Prieſts and they of greater knowledge & eſtimation began to beleeue.
v. 8 ᵇ The Epiſtle vpon S. Steuens day in Chriſtmas.
v. 15 ⸬ Such is the face of al conſtant & cheereful▪ Martyrs, to their perſecutors and iudges.

Annotations to Chapter 6

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. VI.

1. Murmuring.] It commeth of humane infirmitie, that in euery Societie of men (be it neuer ſo holy) there is ſome cauſe giuen or taken by the weake, of murmur and difference, which muſt euer be prouided for and ſtaied in the beginning▪ leſt it grow to further ſchiſme or ſedition. And to al ſuch defects, the more the Church increaſeth in number and diuerſitie of men and Prouinces, the more it is ſubiect. In al which things the ſpiritual Magiſtrates, by the Apoſtles example and authoritie, muſt take orders, as time and occaſion ſhal require. [Margin: Murmuring & emulation.]

3. Seuen men.] We may not thinke that theſe Seuen (here made Deacons) were onely choſen to ſerue profane tables or diſpoſe of the Churches mere temporalles, though by that occaſion only they may ſeeme to ſome now elected, no expreſſe mention being made of any other function, for, diuers circumſtances of this ſame place giue euidence, and ſo doth al antiquitie, that their Office ſtood not principally about profane things, but about the holy Altar. The perſons to bē elected, muſt be ful of the Holy Ghoſt and wiſedom, they muſt after publike praier be ordered and conſecrated by the Apoſtles impoſition of hands, as Biſhops and Prieſts were afterward ordered, ep. ad Tim: where S. Paul alſo requireth in a maner the ſame conditions in them as in Biſhops. Al which would not haue beene preſcribed for any ſecular ſtewardſhip. Yea ſtraight vpon their Ordering here (no doubt by commiſſion of the Apoſtles, which they had not before their election) they preached, baptized, diſputed, and as it may appeare by the wordes ſpoken of S. Steuen, that he was ful of grace and fortitude, they receiued great increaſe of grace by their Deaconſhip. [Margin: The 7 Deacons▪ · 1 Tim. 3. & 4. · Act. 6, ⟨illegible⟩.]

But S. Ignatius ep. 2 ad Tral. can beſt witnes of their Office and the Apoſtles maner and meaning in ſuch things, who writeth thus: It behòueth alſo to pleaſe by al meanes the Deacons, vvhich are for the miniſterie of IESVS CHRIST. For they are not ſeruiteurs of meate and drinke, but miniſters of the Church of God. For vvhat are Deacons but imitatours or folovvers of Chriſt, miniſtring to the Biſhop, as Chriſt to his Father, & vvorking vnto him a cleane and immaculate worke, euen as S. Steuen to S. Iames &c. S. Polycarpe, hath the like in his epiſtle ad Philippenſes. And S. Denys writeth that their Office was about the Altar, and putting the holy bread and chalice vpon the ſame. S. Clement alſo (Apoſt. Conſt. li. ⟨illegible⟩ c. 61.) that their Office among other things, is to aſſiſt the Biſhops, and read the Goſpel in the Seruice &c. S. Cyprian in diuers places (ep. 65. & ep. 49 ad Cornel.) calleth Deacons, the Churches and the Apoſtles Miniſters, and their Office, adminiſtrationens ſacram, an holy adminiſtration. S. Hierom affirmeth, in caput 7 Michcae. and in epiſto. 85 ad Euagriun⟨illegible⟩ tom. 2, Where he checketh ſome of them for preFerring them ſelues before Prieſts, and putteth them in remembrance of their firſt calling, that they be as the Leuites were in reſpect of the Prieſts of the old Law. finally by S. Ambroſe li. 1 Off⟨illegible⟩ c. 41 and Prudentius in Hymno de S. Laurent. ſpeaking of S. Laurence the Deacon, We may ſee their Office was moſt holy. See S. Auguſtine alſo of the dignitie of Deacons ep. 14⟨illegible⟩ ad Valerium. Conc. Carthag. 4. can. 37. 38▪ 39▪ 41. [Margin: The office of Deacons. · Li. Eccl. Hier. c. 1▪ part. 2.]

Chapter 7

Ste⟨illegible⟩ being permitted to anſwer, beginning at Abraham, ſhevveth that God was with their fathers both in other places, and alſo long before the Temple. 4⟨illegible⟩ and that after it vvas built, it could not be (as they groſly imagined) a houſe for God to dwel in. 51 then he inu⟨illegible⟩igheth againſt their ſtifneckednes, and telleth them boldly of their traiterous murdering of Chriſt, as their fathers had done his Prophets afore him. 54 Whereat they being vvood, he ſeeth heauen open, and IESVS therein his Diuine Maieſtie. 57 Whereat they become more mad, ſo that they ſtone him to death (Saul conſenting) he commending his ſoul to IESVS, and humbly praying for them.

1 AND the cheefe prieſt ſaid, Are theſe things ſo?

2 Vvho ſaid, Ye men, brethren and fathers, heare. The God of glorie appeared to our father Abraham vvhen he vvas in Meſopotamia, before that he abode in Charan,

3 and ſaid to him, Goe forth out of thy countrie, and out of thy kinred, and come into a land that I ſhal ſhevv thee.

4 Then vvent he forth out of the land of the Chaldees, and dvvelt in Charan. And from thence, after his father vvas dead, he tranſlated him into this land, vvherein you doe novv dvvel.

5 And he gaue him no inheritance in it, no not the paſe of a foote: and he promiſed to giue it him in poſſeſſion, and to his ſeede after him, vvhen as he had no childe.

6 And God ſpake to him, That his ſeede ſhal be a ſciourner in a ſtrange countrie, and they ſhal ſubdue them to ſeruitude, and ſhal euil intreate them fourehundred yeres:

7 and the nation vvhich they ſhal ſerue, vvil I iudge, ſaid God. and after theſe things they ſhal goeforth, and ſhal ſerue me in this place.

8 And he * gaue him the teſtament of circumciſion, and ſo he * begat Iſaac, and circumciſed him the eight day: and * Iſaac, Iacob: and * Iacob, the tvvelue Patriarches.

9 And the Patriarches through emulatiō, * ſold Ioſeph into Aegypt. and God vvas vvith him:

10 and deliuered him out of al his tribulations, and he * gaue him grace and vviſedom in the ſight of Pharao the king of Aegypt, and he appointed him Gouernour ouer Aegypt and ouer al his houſe.

11 And there came famin vpon al Aegypt and Chanaan, and great tribulation: and our fathers found no victuals.

12 But vvhen * Iacob had heard that there vvas corne in Aegypt: he ſent our fathers firſt:

13 and at the * ſecōd time Ioſeph vvas knovven of his brethren, and his kinred vvas made knovven vnto Pharao.

14 And Ioſeph ſending, called thither Iacob his father and al his kinred in ſeuentie fiue ſoules.

15 And * Iacob deſcended into Aegypt: and * he died, and our fathers.

16 And they vvere tranſlated into Sichem, and vvere * laid in the ſepulchre that Abraham * bought for a price of ſiluer of the ſonnes of Hemor the ſonne of Sichem.

17 And vvhen the time drevv neere of the promiſſe vvhich God had promiſed to Abraham, the people * increaſed and vvas multiplied in Aegypt,

18 vntil an other king aroſe in Aegypt, that knevv not Ioſeph.

19 This ſame circumuenting our ſtocke, afflicted our fathers: that they ſhould expoſe their children, to the end they might not be kept aliue.

20 The ſame time vvas * Moyſes borne, and he vvas acceptable to God, who was nouriſhed three moneths in his fathers houſe

21 And vvhen he vvas expoſed, Pharaos daughter tooke him vp, and nouriſhed him for her ovvne ſonne.

22 And Moyſes vvas inſtructed in al the vviſedom of the Aegyptians: and he vvas mightie in his vvordes and vvorkes.

23 And * vvhen he vvas fully of the age of fourtie yeres, it came to his minde to viſite his brethren the children of Iſraël.

24 And vvhen he had ſeen one ſuffer vvrong, he defended him: and ſtriking the Aegyptian, he reuenged his quarel that ſuſteined the vvrong.

25 And he thought that his brethren did vnderſtand that God by his hand vvould ſaue them: but they vnderſtood it not.

26 And the day folovving * he appeared to them being at ſtrife: and he reconciled them vnto peace, ſaying, Men, ye are brethren, vvherfore hurt you one an other?

27 But he that did the iniurie to his neighbour, repelled him, ſaying, Vvho hath appointed thee prince and iudge ouer vs?

28 Vvhat, vvilt thou kil me, as thou didſt yeſterday kil the Aegyptian?

29 And Moyſes fled vpon this vvord: and he became a ſeiourner in the land of Madian, vvhere he begat tvvo ſonnes,

30 And after fourtie yeres vvere expired, there * appeared to him in the deſert of mount Sina an Angel in the fire of the flame of a buſh.

31 And Moyſes ſeeing it, marueled at the viſion. And as he vvent neere to vevve it, the voice of our Lord vvas made to him,

32 I am the God of thy fathers, the God of Abraham, the God of Iſaac, and the God of Iacob. And Moyſes being made to tremble, durſt not vevve it.

33 And our Lord ſaid to him, Looſe of the ſhoe of thy feete: for the place vvherein thou ſtandeſt, is ″ holy ground.

34 Seeing I haue ſeen the affliction of my people vvhich is in Aegypt, and I haue heard their groning, and am deſcended to deliuer them. And novv come, and I vvil ſend thee into Aegypt.

35 This Moyſes, vvhom they denied, ſaying, Vvho hath appointed the prince and Captaine? him God ſent prince & redeemer, vvith the hand of the Angel that appeared to him in the buſh.

36 He * brought them forth doing vvonders and ſignes in the land of Aegypt, and in the redde ſea, and in the * deſert fourtie yeres.

37 This is that Moyſes vvhich ſaid to the children of Iſraël, A prophet vvil God raiſe vp to you of your ovvne brethren at my ſelf: him you ſhal heare.

38 This is he that * vvas in the aſſemblie in the vvilderneſſe, vvith the Angel that ſpake to him in Mount-Sina, and vvith our fathers: vvho receiued the vvordes of life to giue vnto vs.

39 To vvhom our fathers vvould not be obedient: but they repelled him, and in their hartes turned avvay into Aegypt,

40 ſaying to Aaron: Make vs goddes that may goe before vs▪ for this Moyſes that brought vs out of the land of Aegypt, vve knovv not vvhat is befallen to him.

41 And they made a calfe in thoſe daies, and offered ſacrifice to the Idol, and reioyced in the vvorkes of their ovvne handes.

42 And God turned, and deliuered them vp to ſerue the hoſt of heauen, as it is vvritten in the booke of the Prophets: Did you offer victims and hoſtes vnto me fourtie yeres in the deſert, O houſe of Iſraël?

43 And you tooke vnto you the tabernacle of Moloch, and the ſtarre of your God Rempham, figures vvhich you made, to adore them. And I vvil tranſlate you beyond Babylon.

44 The tabernacle of teſtimonie vvas among our fathers in the deſert, as God ordained ſpeaking to Moyſes, that he ſhould make it according to the forme vvhich he had ſeen.

45 Vvhich our fathers * vvith Ieſus receiuing, brought it in alſo into the poſſeſſion of the Gentiles, vvhich God expelled from the face of our fathers, till in the daies of Dauid,

46 Vvho found grace before God, and * deſired that he might finde a tabernacle for the God of Iacob.

47 And * Salomon built him a houſe.

48 But the Higheſt dvvelleth ″ not in houſes * made by hand, as the prophet ſaith:

49 Heauen is my ſeate: and the earth the foote-ſtole of my feete. Vvhat houſe vvil you build me, ſaith our Lord? or vvhat place is there of my reſting?

50 Hath not my hand made al theſe things?

51 You ſtiffe-necked and of vncircumciſed hartes and eares, you alvvaies reſiſt the holy Ghoſt: as your fathers, your ſelues alſo.

52 Vvhich of the prophets did not your fathers perſecute And they ſlevve them that foretold of the comming of the Iuſt one, of vvhom novv

53 you haue been betraiers and murderers: vvho receiued the Lavv by the diſpoſition of Angels, and haue not kept it.

54 And hearing theſe things they vvere cut in their hartes, and they gnaſhed vvith their teeth at him.

55 But he being ful of the holy Ghoſt, looking ſtedfaſtly vnto heauen, ſavv the glorie of God, and IESVS ſtanding on the right hand of God.

56 And he ſaid, Behold I ſee the heauens opened, and the Sonne of man ſtanding on the right hand of God.

57 And they crying out vvith a loude voice, ſtopped their eares, & vvith one accord ranne violently vpon him.

58 And caſting him forth vvithout the citie, they ″ ſtoned him: and the vvitneſſes laid of their garments * beſide the feete of a yong man that vvas called Saul.

59 And they ſtoned Steuen inuocating, and ſaying: Lord IESVS, receiue my ſpirit.

60 And falling on his knees, he cried vvith a loude voice, ſaying: Lord, lay not this ſinne vnto them. And vvhen he had ſaid this, he fel a ſleepe. And Saul vvas conſenting to his death.

Marginal notes to Chapter 7

v. 2 Gen. 12, 1.
v. 6 Gen. 15, 13.
v. 7 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 8 Gen, 17.
v. 8 Gen. 21.
v. 8 Gen. 25.
v. 9 Gen. 29. 30. 35.
v. 10 Gen. 37.
v. 10 Gen. 41.
v. 11 Gen. 42.
v. 12 Gen. 45.
v. 14 Gen. 46.
v. 15 Gen. 49.
v. 16 ⸬ Tranſlation of Saincts bodies agreable to nature & Scripture. And the deſire to be buried in one place more then an other (which the holy Patriarches alſo had Gen. 49, 29. 50, 24. Hebr. 11, 22.) hath ſometime great cauſes. Aug. de Cur. pr⟨illegible⟩mort. c. 1. & vlt.
v. 16 Gen. 50.
v. 16 Gen. 23.
v. 16 Ioſ. 24.
v. 17 Exo, 1, 7.
v. 20 Exo. 2, 2.
v. 22 Exo. 2, 11▪
v. 25 Exo. 2, 13.
v. 30 Exo. 3, 2.
v. 35 ⸬ Chriſt is our Redeemer, and yet Moyſes is here called redeemer▪ ſo Chriſt is our Mediator and Aduocate, and yet we may haue Saincts our inferior mediators and aduocates alſo. See Annot. 1 ⟨illegible⟩. 2, 1.
v. 36 Exo. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12, 37▪
v. 37 Exo. 16.
v. 37 Deu. 18.
v. 37 Exo. 19, 3. 19.
v. 40 Exo. 32, 1.
v. 42 ⸬ For a iuſt puniſhment of their former offenſes God gaue them vp to worke what wickednes they would them ſelues, as it is ſaid of the Gentils Rom. 1.
v. 42 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩.
v. 42 Amos. 5, 25.
v. 44 Exo. 25. 40.
v. 45 ᶜ This is Ioſuè, ſo called in Greeke in type of our Sauiour.
v. 45 Ioſ. 3, 14.
v. 46 Pſ. 131, 5▪
v. 46 1. Par. 17▪
v. 47 Act. 17, 25.
v. 49 Eſa. 66, 1.
v. 55 ᶜ The comfort of al Martyrs.
v. 58 Act. 22, 20.
v. 60 ⸬ Euſebius Emiſſenus ſaith, whē he praieth for his perſecutors, he promiſeth to his worſhippers his manifeſt interceſſiō & ſuffrages. ⟨illegible⟩. ⟨illegible⟩o. S. Steph. & S. Auguſtine, Si Stephaniu ſi⟨illegible⟩ nō oraſſet, Eccleſi⟨illegible⟩ Paulū nō habere⟨illegible⟩. Serm 1 de Stephano.

Annotations to Chapter 7

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. VII.

33. Holy ground.) If that apparition of God him ſelf or an Angel, could make the place and ground holy, and to be vſed of Moyſes with al ſignes of reuerence and feare-how much more the corporal birth, abode, and wonders of the Sonne of God in Iewrie, and his perſonal preſence in the B. Sacrament, may make that countrie and al Chriſtian Churches & altars holy? And it is the greateſt blindnes that can be, to thinke it ſuperſtition to reuerence any things or places in reſpect of Gods preſence or wonderous operation in the ſame. See S. Hierom. ep. 17, 18. 27. of the holy land. [Margin: The holy land. · Holy places.]

48. Not in houſes.) The vulgar Heretikes alleage this place againſt the corporal being of Chriſt in the B. Sacrament & in Churches: by which reaſon they might haue driuen him out of al houſes, Churches, and corporal places, when he vvas viſible in earth. But it is meant of the Diuinitie only. & ſpoken to correct the carnal Ievves: who thought God either ſo to be conteined, compaſſed, and limited to their Temple, that he could be no vvhere els, or at leaſt that he vvould not heare or receiue mens praiers and ſacrifices in the Churches of the Gentiles, or els vvhere, out of the ſaid Temple. And ſo as it maketh nothing for the Sacramentaries, no more doth it ſerue for ſuch as eſteeme Churches and places of publike praier no more conuenient nor more holy then any other profane houſes or chambers. For though his perſon or vertue be not limited to any place, yet it pleaſeth him condeſcending to our neceſſitie and profite, to vvorke his vvonders and to be vvorſhipped of vs in holy places rather then profane. [Margin: God is not conteined in place, yet he vvil be vvorſhipped in one place more thē in an other.]

38. They ſtoned him.) Read a maruelous narration in S. Auguſtine of one ſtone, that hitting the Martyr on the elbovv, rebounded backe to a faithful man that ſtood neere. Who keeping and carying it vvith him, vvas by reuelation vvarned to leaue it at Ancóna in Italie: vvherevpon a Church or Memorie of S. Steuen vvas there erected, and many miracles done after the ſaid Martyrs body vvas found out, and not before. Aug. ⟨illegible⟩o. 10 ſer. 38 de diuerſis in edit. Pariſ. [Margin: Relikes.]

Chapter 8

So farre is perſecution from preuailing againſt the Church, that by it the Church greweth from Hieruſalem into al Ievvrie and Samaria. 5 The ſecond of the Deacons, Philip▪ conuerteth vvith his miracles the citie it ſelf of Samaria, and baptizeth them, euen Simon Magus alſo him ſelf among the reſt, 14 But the Apoſtles Peter and Iohn are the Miniſters to giue them the Holy Ghoſt. 18 Which miniſterie Simon Magus vvould bie of them. 16 The ſame Philip being ſent of an Angel to a great man of Aethiopia, Who came a Pilgrimage to Hieruſalem, firſt catechizeth him: 16 and then (he profeſsing his faith and deſiring Baptiſme) doth alſo baptize him.

1 AND the ſame day there vvas made a great perſecution in the Church, vvhich vvas at Hieruſalem, and al vvere diſperſed through the countries of Ievvrie and Samaria, ſauing the Apoſtles.

2 And ″ deuout men tooke order for Steuens funeral, and made great mourning vpon him.

3 But Saul * vvaſted the Church: entring in from houſe to houſe, and dravving men and vvomen, deliuered them into priſon.

4 They therfore that vvere diſperſed, paſſed through, euangelizing the vvord.

5 And Philippe deſcending into the citie of Samaria, preached CHRIST vnto them.

6 And the multitudes vvere attent to thoſe things vvhich vvere ſaid of Philippe, vvith one accord hearing, and ſeing the ſignes that he did.

7 For many of them that had vncleane ſpirits, crying vvith a loud voice, vvent out. And many ſicke of the palſey and lame vvere cured.

8 There vvas made therfore great ioy in that citie. ⊢

9 And a certaine man named Simon, vvho before had been in that citie a Magician, ſeducing the nation of Samaria, ſaying him ſelf to be ſome great one:

10 vnto vvhom al harkened from the leaſt to the greateſt, ſaying, This man is the povver of God, that is called great.

11 And they vvere attent vpon him, becauſe a long time he had bewitched them vvith his magical practiſes.

12 But vvhen they had beleeued Philippe euangelizing of the kingdom of God, and of the name of IESVS CHRIST, they vvere baptized, men and vvomen.

13 Then Simon alſo him ſelf beleeued: and being baptized, he cleaued to Philippe. Seing alſo ſignes and very great miracles to be done, he vvas aſtonied vvith admiration.

14 And vvhen the Apoſtles vvho vvere in Hieruſalem, had heard that Samaria had receiued the vvord of God: theyſent vnto them Peter & Iohn.

15 Vvho vvhen they vvere come, praied for them, that they might receiue the holy Ghoſt.

16 For he vvas not yet come vpon any of them, but they vvere only baptized in the name of our Lord IESVS.

17 Then did ″ they impoſe their handes vpon them, and they ″ receiued the holy Ghoſt. ⊢

18 And vvhen Simon had ſeen that by the impoſition of the hand of the Apoſtles, the holy Ghoſt vvas giuen, he ″ offered them money,

19 ſaying, Giue me alſo this povver, that on vvhomſoeuer I impoſe my handes, he may receiue the holy Ghoſt.

20 But Peter ſaid to him, Thy money be vvith thee vnto perdition: becauſe thou haſt thought that the gift of God is purchaſed vvith money.

21 Thou haſt no part, nor lot in this vvord. For thy hart is not right before God.

22 ″ Doe penance therfore from this thy vvickedneſſe: and pray to God, ″ if perhaps this cogitation of thy hart may be remitted thee.

23 For I ſee thou art in the gall of bitternes and the obligation of iniquitie.

24 And Simon anſvvering ſaid, ″ Pray you for me to our Lord, that nothing come vpon me of theſe things vvhich you haue ſaid.

25 And they in deede hauing teſtified and ſpoken the vvord of our Lord, returned to Hieruſalem, and euangelized to many countries of the Samaritans.

26 And an Angel of our Lord ſpake to Philippe, ſaying: Ariſe, and goe tovvard the South, to the vvay that goeth dovvne from Hieruſalem into Gaza: ″ this is deſert.

27 And riſing he vvent. And behold, a man of Aethiopia, an eunuch, of great authoritie vnder Candace the Queene of the Aethiopians, vvho vvas ouer al her treaſures, vvas come to Hieruſalem to adore:

28 and he vvas returning and ſitting vpon his chariot, and reading Eſay the prophet.

29 And the Spirit ſaid to Philippe, Goe neere, and ioyne thy ſelf to this ſame chariot.

30 And Philippe running therevnto, heard him reading Eſay the prophet, and he ſaid: Trovveſt thou that thou vnderſtādeſt the things vvhich thou readeſt?

31 Vvho ſaid, And hovv can I, vnleſſe ſome man ſhevv me? & he deſired Philippe that he vvould come vp and ſit vvith him.

32 And the place of the ſcripture vvhich he did reade, vvas this: As a ſheepe to ſlaughter vvas he led: and as a lambe before his ſhearer, vvithout voice, ſo did he not open his mouth.

33 In humilitie his iudgement vvas taken avvay. His generation vvho ſhal declare, for from the earth ſhal his life be taken?

34 And the ⟨illegible⟩nuch anſvvering Philip, ſaid, I beſeeche thee, of vvhom doth the Prophet ſpeake this? of him ſelf, or of ſome other?

35 And Philip opening his mouth, and beginning from this ſcripture, euangelized vnto him IESVS.

36 And as they vvent by the vvay, they came to a certaine vvater: and the eunuch ſaid, Lo vvater, vvho' doth let me to be baptized?

37 And Philip ſaid, If thou beleeue vvith al thy hart, thou maieſt? And he anſvvering ſaid, I beleeue that IESVS CHRIST is the ſonne of God.

38 And he commaunded the chariot to ſtay: and both vvent dovvne into the vvater, Philip and the Eunuch, and ″ he baptized him.

39 And when they vvere come vp out of the vvater, the Spirit of our Lord tooke avvay Philip, and the eunuch ſavv him no more. And he vvent on his vvay reioycing.

40 But Philip vvas found in Azótus, & paſſing through, he euangelized to al the cities, til he came to Caeſaréa. ⊢

Marginal notes to Chapter 8

Argument The 3. part.
Argument THE propagation of the Church from Hieruſalem into al Iewrie and to Samaria.
v. 2 ᶜ curauerunt ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 3 Act. 22. 4.
v. 4 ⸬ This perſecution wrought much good, being an occaſion that the diſperſed preached Chriſt in diuers Coūtries where they came.
v. 5 The Epiſtle vpō Thurſday in whitſunweeke.
v. 14 The Epiſtle vpō Tueſday in whitſūweeke. And in a votiue of the Holy Ghoſt.
v. 14 ⸬ Sape ſibi ſo⟨illegible⟩e Petrus facit eſſe Ioannem: Eccleſiae quia virgo placet. Arator apud Bedam in Act.
v. 21 ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 22 See Apocal. 9, 21.
v. 26 ᵇ The Epiſtle vpon Thurſday in Eaſter weeke.
v. 27 ⸬ Note that this Aethiopian came to Hieruſalem to adore, that is, on Pilgrimage. where by we may learne that it is an acceptable acte of religion to go from home to places of greater deuotiō & ſanctificatiō.
v. 31 ⸬ The Scriptures are ſo writtē that they can not be vnderſtood without an interpreter, as eaſy as our Proteſtants make them. See S. Hierom Ep. ad Paulinū de omnibus diuin⟨illegible⟩ hiſtoria⟨illegible⟩ libris, ſet in the beginning of latin bibles.
v. 32 Eſ. 53, 7.
v. 36 ` vvhat▪

Annotations to Chapter 8

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. VIII.

2. Deu⟨illegible⟩us men.] As here great deuotion vvas vſed in burying his body, ſo aftervvard at the Inuention & Tranſlation thereof. And the miracles vvrought by the ſame, and at euery litle memorie of the ſame, vvere infinite: as S. Auguſtine vvitneſſeth. li. ⟨illegible⟩ de Ciuil. Dei. c. ⟨illegible⟩. & Sermon. de S. Steph. ⟨illegible⟩. 10. [Margin: S. Steuens relikes.]

14. Sent Peter.] Some Proteſtants vſe this place to proue S. Peter not to be head of the Apoſtles, becauſe he and S. Iohn were ſent by the Tvvelue, by vvhich reaſon they might as vvel conclude that he vvas not equal to the reſt▪ for commonly the Maiſter ſendeth the man, and the Superior the inferior, vvhen the vvord of Sending is exactly vſed. But it is not alvvaies ſo taken in the Scriptures, for then could not the Sonne be ſent by the Father, not the Holy Ghoſt from the Father and the Sonne: nor othervviſe in cōmon vſe of the vvorld, ſeing the inferior or equal may in⟨illegible⟩ea⟨illegible⟩e his frend or Superior to doe his buſines for him, and ſpecially a body Politike or a Corporation may by election or othervviſe chooſe their Head and ſend him. ſo may the Citizens ſend their Maior to the Prince or Parliament, though he be the head of the citie, becauſe he may be more fitte to doe their buſines, alſo the Superior or equal may be ſent by his ovvne conſent or deſire. Laſtly, the College of the Apoſtles compriſing Peter vvith the reſt, (as euery ſuch Body implieth both the head and the members) vvas greater then Peter their head alone. as the Prince and Parliament is greater then the Prince alone. And ſo Peter might be ſent as by authoritie of the vvhole College, notvvithſtanding he vvere the head of the ſame. [Margin: That Peter was ſent, is no reaſon againſt his Primacie.]

17. Did they impoſe.] If this Philip had been ⟨illegible⟩ an Apoſtle (ſaith S. Bede) he might haue impoſed his handes, that they might haue receiued the Holy Ghoſt, but this none can doe ſauing Biſhops. For though Prieſts may baptize, and anoint the Baptized alſo vvith Chriſme conſecrated by a Biſhop: yet he can not ſigne his forehead vvith the ſame holy oile, becauſe that belongeth only to Biſhops▪ vvhen they giue the holy Ghoſt to the Baptized. So ſaith he touching the Sacrament of Confirmation in 8 Act. This impoſition therfore of hands together vvith the praiers here ſpecified (vvhich no doubt vvere the very ſame that the Church yet vſeth to that purpoſe) vvas the miniſtration of the Sacrament of Confirmation. Whereof S. Cyptian ſaith thus. They that in Samaria vvere baptized of Philip, becauſe they had lavvful and Eccleſiaſtical Baptiſme, ought not to be baptized any more: but only that vvhich vvanted, vvas done by Peter and Iohn, to vvit, that by praier made for them and impoſition of handes, the Holy Ghoſt might be povvred vpon them. Vvhich novv alſo is done vvith vs, that they vvhich in the Church are baptized, be by the Rulers of the Church offered, and by our praier and impoſition of hand receiue the Holy Ghoſt, and be ſigned vvith our Lordes ſeale. So S. Cyprian. But the Heretikes obiect that yet here is no mention of oile. To vvhom vve ſay, that many things vvere done and ſaid in the adminiſtration of this and other Sacraments, and al inſtituted by Chriſt him ſelf and deliuered to the Church by the Apoſtles, vvhich are not particularly vvritten by the Euangeliſts or any other in the Scripture, among vvhich this is euident by al antiquitie and moſt general practiſe of the Church, to be one. [Margin: The Sacrament of Confirmation, miniſtred by Biſhops onely. · ⟨illegible⟩p. 73. ⟨illegible⟩. 3 ad lubaianum.]

S. Denys ſaith, The Prieſts did preſent the baptized to the Biſhop, that he might ſigne them diuino & d⟨illegible⟩ifico vnguento, vvith the diuine and deifical ointment. And againe, Aduentum S. Spiritus conſummans inunctio largitur, the inunction conſummating giueth the comming of the Holy Ghoſt. Tertullian de reſur carn. nu. 7 & li. 1 adu. Marcio. ſpeaketh of this Cōfirmation by Chriſme thus: The fleſh is anointed, that the ſoul may be conſecrated: the fleſh is ſigned, that the ſoul may be ſenſed: the fleſh by impoſition of hand is ſhadovved, that the ſoul by the Spirit may be illuminated. S. Cyprian likevviſe, ep. 70. nu. 2. He muſt alſo be anointed, that is baptized, vvith the oile ſanctified on the Altar: And ep. 72 (ſee alſo ep. 73. nu. 3) he expreſly calleth it a Sacrament, ioyning it vvith Baptiſme, as Melchiades doth (ep. ad omnes Hiſpania⟨illegible⟩ Epiſcopos nu. 2. to 1 Con⟨illegible⟩.) ſhevving the difference betvvixt it and Baptiſme. S. Auguſtine alſo, cont. lit. Petil. li. 2. c. 104. The Sacrament of Chriſme in the kind of viſible ſeales is ſacred and holy, euen as Baptiſme it ſelf. Vve omit S. Cyril myſtag. 3. S. Ambroſe li. 3 de Sacram. c. 2. & de ijs qui myſterijs initiantur c. 7. S. Leo ep. 88. the aūcient Councels alſo of Laodicea, can. 48. Carthage 3 can. 39. and Arauſicanum 4 can. 1. and others. And S. Clement (Apoſt. Conſt. li. 7▪ c. 44) reporteth certaine cōſtitutions of the Apoſtles touching the ſame. S. Denys referreth the maner of conſecration of the ſame Chriſme to the Apoſtles inſtruction. S. Baſil li. de Sp. ſancto c. 27 calleth it a tradition of the Apoſtles. And the moſt aūcient Martyr S. Fabian ⟨illegible⟩p. 2 ad omnes Orientales Epiſcopos in initio, to. 1 Conc. ſaith plainely that Chriſt him ſelf did ſo inſtruct the Apoſtles at the time of the inſtitution of the B. Sacramēt of the Altar. And ſo doth the Author of the booke de vnctione Chriſmatis apud D. Cyprianum nu. 1. telling the excellent effects and graces of this Sacrament, and vvhy this kinde of oile and balſme vvas taken of the old Lavv, & vſed in the Sacraments of the nevv Teſtament. Vvhich thing the Heretikes can vvith leſſe cauſe obiect againſt the Church, ſeeing they confeſſe that Chriſt and his Apoſtles tooke the ceremonie of impoſition of hands in this and other Sacraments, from the Ievves maner of conſecrating their hoſtes deputed to ſacrifice. [Margin: Ec. Hier. c. 2 & 4. · Chriſme in Cōfirmation. · * Ec. Hier. c. 4. · * Beza in Act. c. 6. v. 6.]

To conclude, neuer none denied or contemned this Sacrament of Confirmation and holy Chriſme, but knovven Heretikes. S. Cornelius that B. Martyr ſo much praiſed of S. Cyprian, ep. ad Fabium apud Euſeb. li. 6 c. 35 affirmeth, that Nouatus fel to Hereſie, for that he had not receiued the Holy Ghoſt by the con⟨illegible⟩ignation of a Biſhop. Vvhom al the Nouatians did folovv, neuer vſing that holy Chriſme, as Theodorete vvriteth, li, 1 Fabul. Haer. And Optatus li. 2 cont Parm. vvriteth that it vvas the ſpecial barbarous ſacrilege of the Donatiſts, to conculcate the holy oile. But al this is nothing to the ſauage diſorder of Caluiniſts in this point. [Margin: Old hereſies againſt confirmation and Chriſme.]

17. And they receiued the Holy Ghoſt.] The Proteſtants charge the Catholikes, that by approuing and commending ſo much the Sacrament of Confirmation, and by attributing to it ſpecially the gift of the Holy Ghoſt, they diminiſh the force of Baptiſme, chalenging alſo boldly the aūcient Fathers for the ſame. As though any Catholike or Doctor euer ſaid more then the expreſſe vvordes of Scripture here and els vvhere plainely giue them vvarrant for. If they diminiſh the vertue of Baptiſme, then did Chriſt ſo, appointing his Apoſtles and al the Faithful euen after their Baptiſme to expecte the Holy Ghoſt & vertue from aboue▪ then did the Apoſtles iniurie to Baptiſme, in that they impoſed hands on the baptized, and gaue them the Holy Ghoſt. And this is the Heretikes blindnes in this caſe, that they can not, or vvil not ſee that the Holy Ghoſt is giuen in Baptiſme to remiſſion of ſinnes, life, and ſanctification: & in Confirmation, for force, ſtrength, and corroboration to fight againſt al our ſpiritual enemies, and to ſtand conſtantly in confeſſion of our faith, euen to death, in times of perſecution either of the Heathen or of Heretikes, vvith great increaſe of grace. And let the good Reader note here our Aduerſaries great peruerſity and corruption of the plaine ſenſe of the Scriptures in this point: ſome of them affirming the Holy Ghoſt here to be no other but the gift of vviſedom in the Apoſtles and a fevv moe to the gouernement of the Church, vvhen it is plaine that not only the Gouerners but al that vvere baptized, receiued this grace, both men and vvomen. Some, that it vvas no internal grace, but only the gift of diuers languages: Vvhich is very falſe, the gift of Tongues being but a ſequele and an accident to the grace, and an external token of the invvard gift of the Holy Ghoſt, and our Sauiour calleth it vertue from aboue. Some ſay, that vvhatſoeuer it vvas, it vvas but a miraculous thing, and dured no longer then the gift of the Tongues ioyned therevnto, by vvhich euaſion they deny alſo the Sacrament of Extreme Vnction, and the force of Excommunication, becauſe the corporal puniſhments vvhich vvere annexed often times in the Primitiue Church vnto it, ceaſeth, and ſo may they take avvay (as they meane to do) al Chriſts faith or religion, becauſe it hath not the like operation of miracles as in the beginning. But S. Auguſtine toucheth this point fully. Is there any man (ſaith he) of ſo peruerſe an hart, to deny theſe Children on vvhom vve novv impoſed hands, to haue receiued the Holy Ghoſt, becauſe they ſpeake not vvith Tongues? &c. Laſtly, ſome of them make no more of Con⟨illegible⟩irmation or the Apoſtles facte, but as of a doctrine, inſtruction, or exhortation to continevv in the ſaith receiued. Vvherevpon they haue turned this holy Sacrament into a Catechiſme. There are alſo that put the baptized cōming to yeres of diſcretiō, to their ovvne choiſe vvhether they vvil cōtinevv Chriſtiās or no. To ſuch diueliſh and diuers inuentions they fall, that vvill not obey Gods Churche nor the expreſſe Scriptures, vvhich tel vs of praier, of impoſition of hands, of the Holy Ghoſt, of grace and vertue from aboue, and not of inſtruction, vvhich might and may be done as vvel before Baptiſme, & by others, as by Apoſtles and Biſhops, to vvhom only this Holy function pertaineth, in ſo much that in our Countrie it is called Biſhoping. [Margin: * ke⟨illegible⟩nit. in exam. conc. Trid. de Con⟨illegible⟩ir. · The effectes of Baptiſme and Confirmation differ. · Haeretical ſhiftes and euaſiōs againſt manifeſt Scriptures, and againſt this Sacrament of Confirmation. · Tractat. 6 in ⟨illegible⟩p. 10. · * See Con⟨illegible⟩. Trid. Seſs. ⟨illegible⟩ can. 1 de Confirmat. · * Cone. Trid. ſeſs. ⟨illegible⟩ can. 14 de Bapt. · Biſhoping.]

18. Offered money.) This vvicked ſorcerer Simon is noted by S. Irenaeus li, 1 c. 20. and others, to haue been the firſt Heretike, & father of al Heretikes to come, in the Church of God. He taught, only faith in him, vvithout good life and vvorkes, to be ynough to ſaluation▪ ⟨illegible⟩e gaue the onſet to purchaſe vvith his money a ſpiritual function, that is to be made a Biſhop▪ for, to haue povver to giue the Holy Ghoſt by impoſition of hādes, is to be a Biſhop: as to bye the povver to remitte ſinnes or to conſecrate Chriſts body, is to bye to be a Prieſt, or to bye Prieſthod: and to bye the authoritie to miniſter Sacraments, to preach or to haue cure of ſoules, is to bye a benefice, and likevviſe in al other ſpiritual things, vvhereof either to make ſale or purchaſe for money or money vvorth, is a great horrible ſinne called Simonie: and in ſuch as thinke it lavvful (as here Simon iudged it) it is named Simoniacal Hereſie, of this deteſtable man vvho firſt attempted to bie a ſpiritual function or office. D. Greg. apud ⟨illegible⟩oan. Diac. in vit. li. ⟨illegible⟩, c. 2. ⟨illegible⟩. 4. 5. [Margin: Simonie.]

22. Doe penance.) S. Auguſtine (ep. 108) vnderſtanding this of the penance done in the Primitiue Church for heinous offenſes▪ doth teach vs to tranſlate this and the like places (2 Cor. 12, 21. Apoc. 9, 21) as vve doe, and as it is in the vulgar Latin, and conſequently that the Greeke ⟨non-Latin script⟩ doth ſignifie ſo much. Yea vvhen he addeth, that very good men doe daily penance for venial ſinnes by faſting, praier, and almes, he vvarranteth this phraſe and tranſlation through out the nevv Teſtament, ſpecially him ſelf alſo reading ſo as it is in the vulgar Latin, and as vve tranſlate. [Margin: Pena⟨illegible⟩ce.]

22. If perhaps.] You may ſee, great penance is here required for remiſſion of ſinne, & that men muſt ſtand in feare and dread leſt they be not vvorthy to be heard or to obteine mercie. Vvhereby al men that bye or ſel any ſpiritual functions, dignities, offices, or liuings, may ſpecially be vva⟨illegible⟩ned that the ſinne is exceding great.

24. Pray you for me.] As this Sorc⟨illegible⟩er had more knovvledge of the true religion then the Proteſtants haue, vvho ſee not that the Apoſtles and Biſhops can giue the Holy Ghoſt in this Sacrament, or other, vvhich he plainely perceiued and confeſſed, ſo ſurely he vvas more religious then they, that being ſo ſharply checked by the Apoſtle, yet blaſphemed not as they do vvhen they be blamed by the Gouerners of the Church, but deſired the Apoſtles to pray for him. [Margin: Simon Magus more religious then the Proteſtants.]

27. This is deſert.] Intolerable boldnes of ſome Proteſtants, here alſo (as in other places) againſt al copies both Greeke and Latin, to ſurmiſe corruption or falſhod of the text, ſaying it can not be ſo: Vvhich is to accuſe the holy Euangeliſt, and to blaſpheme the Holy Ghoſt him ſelf. See Beza, vvho is often very ſaucie vvith S. Luke. [Margin: Beza. · Annot. ⟨illegible⟩. Teſt. 155⟨illegible⟩.]

38. He baptized him.] When the Heretikes of this time finde mention made in Scripture of any Sacrament miniſtred by the Apoſtles or other in the Primitiue Church, they imagine no more vvas done then there is expreſly told, nor ſcarſly beleeue ſo much. As if impoſition of hands in the Sacrament of Confirmation be onely expreſſed, they thinke there vvas no chriſme nor other vvorke or vvord vſed. So they thinke no more ceremonie vvas vſed in the baptizing of this noble man, then here is mentioned. Vvherevpon S. Auguſtine hath theſe memorable vvordes, In that that he ſaith, Philip baptized him, he vvould haue it vnderſtood that al things vvere done, vvhich though in the Scriptures for breuitie ſake they are not mentioned, yet by order of tradition vve knovv vvere to be done. [Margin: The ceremonies of Sacraments done, though not mentioned. · De fid. & ⟨illegible⟩p. ⟨illegible⟩. 9.]

Chapter 9

Saul not content to perſecute ſo cruelly in Hieruſalem, 3 is in the vvay to Da⟨illegible⟩ſcus told by our Lord IESVS of his vaine attempt, and miraculouſly conuerted to be an Apoſtle: and after great penance, reſtored to his ſight by Ananias, and baptized. 20 And preſently he dealeth mightily againſt the Ievves, prouing IESVS to be Chriſt, to their great admiration. 23 But ſuch is their obſtinacie, that they lay al Damaſcus to kil him, 26 From thence he goeth to Hieruſalem, and there ioyneth vvith the Apoſtles, and againe by the obſtinate Ievves his death is ſought. 31 The Church being novv grovven ouer al Ievvrie, Galilee, and Samaria, Peter viſiteth al: and in his viſitation, 33 healing a lameman, 36 and raiſing a dead vvoman, conuerteth very many.

1 AND Saul as yet breathing forth threatenings and ſlaughter againſt the diſciples of our Lord, came to the high prieſt,

2 and aſked letters of him vnto Damaſcus to the ſynagogs, that if he had found any men and vvomen of this vvay, he might bring them bound vnto Hieruſalem.

3 And as he vvent on his iourney, it chaunced that he drevv nigh to Damaſcus: and * ſodenly a light from heauen ſhined round about him.

4 And falling on the ground, he heard a voice ſaying to him, Saul, Saul vvhy perſecuteſt thou me?

5 Vvho ſaid, Vvho art thou Lord? And he, I am IESVS vvhom thou doeſt perſecute, it is hard for thee to kicke againſt the pricke.

6 And trembling and being aſtonied he ſaid, Lord, vvhat vvilt thou haue me to doe?

7 And our Lord to him, Ariſe, and goe into the citie, and it ſhal be told thee vvhat thou muſt doe. But the men that vvent in companie vvith him, ſtood amaſed, hearing the voice, but ſeeing no man.

8 And Saul roſe vp from the ground, and his eies being opened, he ſavv nothing. And they dravving him by the hādes, brought him into Damaſcus.

9 And he vvas three daies not ſeeing, and he did neither eate nor drinke.

10 And there vvas a certaine diſciple at Damaſcus, named Ananias: and our Lord ſaid to him in a viſion, Ananias. But he ſaid, Loe, here I am Lord.

11 And our Lord to him, Ariſe, & goe into the ſtreate that is called Straight: and ſeeke in the houſe of Iudas, one named Saul of Tarſus. for behold he prayeth. (

12 And he ſavv a man named Ananias, comming in and impoſing handes vpon him for to receiue his ſight.)

13 But Ananias anſvvered, Lord, I haue heard by many of this man, hovv much euil he hath done to thy ſainctes in Hieruſalem:

14 and here he hath authoritie from the cheefe prieſts to binde al that inuocate thy name.

15 And our Lord ſaid to him, Goe, for a veſſel of election is this man ⟨illegible⟩ carie my name before the Gentiles, and kinges, ⟨illegible⟩ children of Iſraël.

16 For I vvil ſhevv him hovv grea⟨illegible⟩ ⟨illegible⟩ muſt ſuffer for my name.

17 And Ananias vvent, and entred into the houſe: and impoſing handes vpon him, he ſaid, Brother Saul, our Lord IESVS hath ſent me, he that appeared to thee in the vvay that thou cameſt: that thou maieſt ſee and be filled vvith the holy Ghoſt.

18 And forthvvith there fel from his eies as it vvere ſcales, and he receiued ſight. and riſing he vvas baptized.

19 And vvhen he had taken meate, he vvas ſtrengthened. And he vvas vvith the diſciples that vvere at Damaſcus, for certaine daies.

20 And incontinent entring into the ſynagogs, he preached IESVS, that this is the ſonne of God.

21 And al that heard, vvere aſtonied, and ſaid, Is not this he that expugned in Hieruſalem thoſe that inuocated this name: and came hither to this purpoſe that he might bring them bound to the cheefe prieſts?

22 But Saul vvaxed mightie much more, and confounded the Ievves that dvvelt at Damaſcus, affirming that this is CHRIST. ⊢

23 And vvhen many daies vvere paſſed, the Ievves conſulted that they might kil him.

24 But their conſpiracie came to Sauls knovvledge. And * they kept the gates alſo day and night, that they might kil him.

25 But the diſciples taking him in the night, conueied him avvay by the vvall, letting him dovvne in a baſket.

26 And vvhen he vvas come into Hieruſalem, he aſſaied to ioyne him ſelf to the diſciples, & al feared him, not beleeuing that he vvas a diſciple.

27 But Barnabas tooke him & brought him to the Apoſtles, and told them hovv in the vvay he had ſeen our Lord, and that he ſpake vnto him, and hovv in Damaſcus he dealt confidently in the name of IESVS.

28 And he vvas vvith them going in and going out in Hieruſalem, and dealing confidently in the name of our Lord.

29 He ſpake alſo to the Gentiles, and diſputed vvith the Greekes: but they ſought to kil him.

30 Vvhich vvhen the brethren had knovven, they brought him dovvné to Caeſaréa, and ſent him avvay to Tarſus.

31 The ⸬ CHVRCH truely through al Ievvrie & Galilee and Samaria had peace, & vvas edified, vvalking in the feare of our Lord, and vvas repleniſhed vvith the conſolation of the holy Ghoſt.

32 And it came to paſſe, that Peter as he paſſed through al, came to the ſaincts that dvvelt at Lydda.

33 and he found there a certaine man named Aeneas, lying in his bed from eight yeres before, vvho had the palſey.

34 And Peter ſaid to him, Aeneas, our Lord IESVS CHRIST heale' thee: ariſe, and make thy bed. And incontinent he aroſe.

35 And al that dvvelt at Lydda and Satóna, ſavv him: vvho conuerted to our Lord.

36 And in Ioppé there vvas a certaine diſciple named Tabitha, vvhich by interpretation is called Dorcas. This vvomā vvas ful of good vvorkes and almes-deedes vvhich ſhe did.

37 And it came to paſſe in thoſe daies, that ſhe vvas ſicke and died. Vvhom vvhen they had vvaſhed, they laid her in an vpper chamber.

38 And vvhereas Lydda vvas nigh to Ioppé, the diſciples hearing that Peter vvas in it, they ſent tvvo men vnto him, deſiring him, Be not loth to come ſo farre as to vs.

39 And Peter riſing vp came vvith them. And vvhen he vvas come, they brought him into the vpper chamber: and al the vvidovves ſtoode about him vveeping, and ſhevving him the coates and garments vvhich Dorcas made them.

40 And al being put forth, Peter falling on his knees praied, and turning to the body he ſaid: Tabitha, ariſe. And ſhe opened her eies: and ſeeing Peter, ſhe ſate vp.

41 And giuing her his hand, he lifted her vp. And vvhen he had called the ſaincts and the vvidovves, he preſented her aliue.

42 And it vvas made knovven through out al Ioppé: and many beleeued in our Lord.

43 And it came to paſſe that he abode many daies in Ioppé, vvith one Simon a tanner.

Marginal notes to Chapter 9

v. 1 Act. 22, 4 Gal. 1, 13.
v. 1 The Epiſtle vpō the Conuerſion of S. Paul Ian. 25.
v. 3 1. Cor. 15, 8.
v. 4 ⸬ The heretikes that conclude CHRIST ſo in heauen that he cā be no where els til the day of Iudgement, ſhal hardly reſolue a mā that would know where CHRIST was when he appeared here in the way, and ſpake theſe words to Saul.
v. 18 ⸬ Paul alſo him ſelf, though with the diuine and heauenly voice proſtrated and inſtructed, yet was ſent to a man to receiue the Sacraments, & to be ioyned to the Church. Auguſt. de doct. Chr. lib. 1. in Pr⟨illegible⟩m.
v. 24 2 Cor. 11, 32.
v. 31 The Church viſibly procedeth ſtill vvith much comfort & manifold increaſe euen by perſecution.
v. 34 ` healeth
v. 36 ⸬ Behold good vvorkes and almes-deedes, & the force thereof reaching euen to the next life.
v. 39 ⸬ The praiers of our Almes folke & beadſmen may do vs great good euē after our departure. For if they procured her temporal life, much more may they helpe vs to Gods merc⟨illegible⟩e and to releaſe of puniſhment in Purgatorie.

Chapter 10

Becauſe the Ievves ſo much abhorred the Gentils, for the better vvarrant of their Chriſtening, an Angel appeareth to Cornelius the deuout Italian. 9 and a viſion is ſhevved to Peter him ſelf (the cheefe and Paſtor of al) 19 and the Spirit ſpeaketh to him, 34 yea and as he is Catechizing them about IESVS, 44 the holy Ghoſt commeth viſibly vpon them: and therfore not fearing any longer the offenſe of the Ievves, he commaundeth to baptize them.

1 AND there vvas a certaine man in Caeſaréa, named Cornelius, Centurion of that vvhich is called the Italian band,

2 religious, & fearing God vvith al his houſe, ″ doing many almes-deedes to the people. And alvvaies praying to God,

3 he ſavv in a viſion manifeſtly, about the ninthe houre of the day, an Angel of God comming in vnto him, and ſaying to him, Cornelius.

4 But he beholding him, taken vvith feare, ſaid, Vvho art thou Lord? And he ſaid to him, Thy praiers and thy almes-deedes are aſcended into remembrance in the ſight of God.

5 And novv ſend men vnto Ioppé, and call hither one Simon that is ſurnamed Peter.

6 he lodgeth vvith one Simon a tanner, vvhoſe houſe is by the ſea ſide. he vvil tel thee vvhat thou muſt doe.

7 And vvhen the Angel vvas departed that ſpake to him, he called tvvo of his houſhold, and a ſouldiar that feared our Lord, of them that vvere vnder him.

8 To vvhom vvhen he had told all, he ſent them vnto Ioppé.

9 And the next day vvhiles they vvere going on their iourney, and dravving nigh to the citie, Peter vvent vp into the higher partes, ″ to pray about the ſixt houre.

10 And being hungrie, he vvas deſirous to take ſomevvhat. And as they vvere preparing, there fel vpon him an exceſſe of minde:

11 and he ſavv the heauen opened, and a certaine veſſel deſcending, as it vvere a great lin̄en ſheete vvith foure corners let dovvne from heauen to the earth,

12 vvherein vvere al foure-footed beaſtes, and that creepe on the earth, and foules of the aire.

13 And there came a voice to him, Ariſe Peter: kil, and eate.

14 But Peter ſaid, God forbid, Lord: for I did neuer eate any common and vncleane thing.

15 And a voice came to him againe the ſecond time, That vvhich God hath purified, doe not thou cal common.

16 And this vvas done thriſe. and forthvvith the veſſel was taken vp againe into heauen.

17 And vvhiles Peter doubted vvithin him ſelf, vvhat the viſion ſhould be that he had ſeen, behold the men that vvere ſent from Cornelius, inquiring for Simons houſe, ſtood at the gate.

18 And vvhen they had called, they aſked, if Simon that is ſurnamed Peter, vvere lodged there.

19 And as Peter vvas thinking of the viſion, the Spirit ſaid to him, Behold three men doe ſeeke thee.

20 Ariſe therfore, and get thee dovvne, and goe vvith them, doubting nothing: for I haue ſent them.

21 And Peter going dovvne to the men, ſaid, Behold, I am he vvhom you ſeeke: vvhat is the cauſe, for the vvhich you are come?

22 Vvho ſaid, Cornelius the Centurion, a iuſt man & that feareth God, and hauing teſtimonie of al the nation of the Ievves, receiued an anſvver of an holy Angel to ſend for thee into his houſe, and to heare vvordes of thee.

23 Therfore bringing them in, he lodged them. ✝ And the day folovving he aroſe and vvent vvith them: and certaine of the brethren of Ioppé accompanied him.

24 And on the morow he entred into Caeſaréa. And Cornelius expected them, hauing called together his kinne, and ſpecial frendes.

25 And it came to paſſe, Vvhen Peter vvas come in▪ Cornelius came to meete him, and falling at his feete ″ adored.

26 But Peter lifted him vp ſaying, Ariſe, my ſelf alſo am a man.

27 And talking vvith him, he vvent in, and findeth many that vvere aſſembled,

28 and he ſaid to them, You knovv hovv abominable it is for a man that is a Ievve, to ioyne, or to approche vnto a ſtranger: but God hath ſhevved to me, to call no man cōmon or vncleane.

29 For the vvhich cauſe, making no doubt, I came vvhen I vvas ſent for. I demaund therfore, for vvhat cauſe you haue ſent for me?

30 And Cornelius ſaid, Foure daies ſince, vntil this houre, I vvas praying the ninthe houre in my houſe, and behold a man ſtoode before me in vvhite apparel,

31 and ſaid: Cornelius, thy praier is heard, and thy almes-deedes are in memorie in the ſight of God.

32 Send therfore to Ioppé, and call hither Simon that is ſurnamed Peter: he lodgeth in the houſe of Simon a tanner by the ſea ſide.

33 Immediatly therfore I ſent to thee: and thou haſt done vvel in comming. Novv therfore al vve are preſent in thy ſight, to heare al things vvhatſoeuer are commaunded thee of the Lord.

34 And Peter opening his mouth, ſaid, In very deede I perceiue that God is not an accepter of perſons.

35 but in euery nation, he that feareth him, and vvorketh iuſtice, is acceptable to him.

36 The word did God ſend to the children of Iſraël, preaching peace by IESVS CHRIST (this is Lord of al.)

37 You knovv the vvord that hath been made through al Ievvrie, for * beginning frō Galilee, after the baptiſme vvhich Iohn preached.

38 IESVS of Nazareth hovv God anointed him vvith the holy Ghoſt and vvith povver, vvho vvent through out doing good and healing al that vvere oppreſſed of the Deuil, becauſe God vvas vvith him.

39 And vve are vvitneſſes of al things that he did in the countrie of the Ievves and in Hieruſalem, vvhom they killed hanging him vpon a tree.

40 Him God raiſed vp the third day and ″ gaue him to be made manifeſt,

41 not to al the people, but to vs, vvho did eate and drinke vvith him after he roſe againe from the dead.

42 And he commaunded vs to preach to the people, and to teſtifie that it is he that of God vvas appointed iudge of the liuing and of the dead.

43 To him al the prophets giue teſtimonie, that al receiue remiſſion of ſinnes by his name, vvhich beleeue in him. ⊢

44 As Peter vvas yet ſpeaking theſe vvordes, the holy Ghoſt fel vpon al that heard the vvord.

45 And the faithful of the Circumciſion that came with Peter, vvere aſtonied, for that the grace of the holy Ghoſt vvas poured out vpon the Gentiles alſo.

46 For they heard them ſpeaking with tonges, and magnifying God. Then Peter anſvvered,

47 Can any man forbid vvater, that theſe ſhould not be ″ baptized vvhich haue receiued the holy Ghoſt as vvel as vve?

48 And he commaūded them to be baptized in the name of our Lord IESVS CHRIST. ⊢ Then they deſired him that he vvould tarie vvith them certaine daies.

Marginal notes to Chapter 10

Argument The 4 part.
Argument THE propagation of the Church to the Gentils alſo.
v. 15 ⸬ Here God firſt vttered to Peter that the time was come to preach alſo to the Gentiles, and to cōuerſe with them for their ſaluation, no leſſe then with the Iewes, with ful freedō to eate al meates without reſpecte of the prohibition of certaine, made in the old Law.
v. 30 ᶜ In the Greeke, faſting & praying.
v. 30 ᶜ At the time of praier ſpecially God ſendeth men comfortable viſitations.
v. 30 ⸬ Note theſe apparitions and viſions to S. Peter, Cornelius, and others, in the Scriptures very oftē, agaīſt the incredulity of our Heretikes, that wil beleeue neither viſion nor miracle, not expreſſed in Scripture: theſe being beleeued of Chriſtian men euē before they were written.
v. 35 ᶜ Not ſuch as beleeue only, but ſuch as feare God and worke iuſtice, are acceptable to him.
v. 37 ᵇ The Epiſtle vpō Munday in Eaſter weeke.
v. 37 Mat. 4, 12,
v. 41 The Epiſtle vpō Munday in vvhitſōvveeke.

Annotations to Chapter 10

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. X.

2. Doing many almes deedes.] He knevv God creator of al, but that his omnipotent Sonne vvas incarnate, he knevv not: and in that faith he made praiers and gaue almes vvhich pleaſed God. and by vvel doing he deſerued to knovv God perfectly, to beleeue the myſterie of the Incarnation, and to come to the Sacrament of Baptiſme. So ſaith Venerable Bede out of S. Gregorie. And S. Auguſtine thus, li. 1 de Bapt. c. 8. Becauſe vvhatſoeuer goodnes he had in praiers and almes, the ſame could not profite him vnles he vvere by the band of Chriſtian Societie and peace, incorporated to the Church, he is bidden to ſend vnto Peter, that by him he may learne Chriſt, by him he may be baptized, &c. Vvhereby it appeareth that ſuch vvorkes as are done before iuſtification, though they ſuffice not to ſaluation, yet be acceptable preparatiues to the grace of iuſtification, and ſuch as moue God to mercie, as it might appeare alſo by Gods like prouident mercifulnes * to the Eunuche. though al ſuch vvorkes preparatiue come of grace alſo: othervviſe they could neuer deſerue at Gods hand of congruity or any othervviſe tovvard iuſtification. [Margin: Good vvorkes before faith, are preparatiues to the ſame, not properly meritorious. · ⟨illegible⟩ed. in hūc locum. · Act. 8.]

9. To pray about the ſixt houre.] The houre is ſpecified, for that there vvere certaine appointed times of praies vſed in the Lavv, vvhich deuout perſons, according to the publike ſeruice in the Temple, obſerued alſo priuately: and vvhich the Apoſtles and holy Church aftervvard both kept and increaſed. Vvhereof thus vvriteth S. Cyprian very notably. In celebrating their praiers, vve finde that the three children with Daniel obſerued the third ſixt, and ninthe houre, as in Sacrament (or myſterie) of the holy Trinitie. &c. And a litle after, Which ſpaces of houres the vvorſhippers of God ſpiritually (or myſtically) determining long ſince, obſerued ſet times to pray: and aftervvard the thing became manifeſt, that it vvas for Sacrament (or myſterie) that the iuſt ſo praied. For at the third houre the holy Ghoſt deſcended vpon the Apoſtles, fulfilling the grace of our Lords promis, and at the ſixt houre Peter going vp to the higher roome of the houſe, vvas both by voice and ſigne from God inſtructed, that al Nations ſhould be admitted to the grace of ſaluation, vvhereas of cleanſing the Gentiles he doubted before, and our Lord being crucified at the ſixt houre, at ninthe vvaſhed avvay our ſinnes vvith his bloud. But to vs (deerly beloued) beſide the ſeaſons obſerued of old, both the times and ſacraments of praying be increaſed. for vve muſt pray in the morning early, that the Reſurrection of our Lord may be celebrated by morning praier: as of old the holy Ghoſt deſigned in the Pſalme, ſaying, In the morning early vvil I ſtand vp to thee, early in the morning vvilt thou heare my voice. Tovvard the euening alſo vvhen the ſunne departeth, and the day endeth, vve muſt of neceſsitie pray againe. [Margin: The Canonical houres. · De Orat. · Dom. nu. 15. · Act. 2. · Act. 10. · Luc. 23. · Mattins. · Pſal. 5. · Euenſong.]

S. Hierom alſo vvriting of Daniels praying three times in a day, ſaith: There are three times, vvherein vve muſt bovv our knees to God. The third, the ſixt, and the ninthe houre the Eccleſiaſtical tradition doth vvel vnderſtand. Moreouer at the third houre the Holy Ghoſt deſcended vpon the Apoſtles. at the ſixt, Peter vvent vp into a higher chamber to pray. at the ninthe, * Peter and Iohn vvent to the Temple. Againe vvriting to Euſtochium a virgin and Nonne ep. 22. c. 16. Though the Apoſtle bid vs pray alvvaies, and to holy perſons their very ſleepe is praier: yet vve muſt haue diſtinct houres of praier, that if perhaps vve be othervviſe occupied, the very time may admoniſh vs of our office or duety. The third, ſixt, ninthe houre, morning early, and the euening, no man can be ignorant of. And to Demetrias ep. 8. c. 8. that in the Pſalmes and praier ſhe muſt keepe alvvaies the third, ſixt, ninthe houre, euening, midnight, and morning. He hath the like ep. 7 c. 5. And (ep. 27 c. 10.) he telleth hovv Paula the holy Abbeſſe vvith her religious Nonnes ſang the Pſalter in order, in the morning, at the third, ſixt, ninthe houre, euening, midnight. by midnight meaning the time of Martins (therfore called Nocturnes agreably to S. Cyprian de Orat. Do. num. 15) and by the morning, the firſt houre called Prime: al correſpondent to the times and houres of Chriſts Paſſion, as in S. Matthevv is noted c▪ 26. 27. By al vvhich vve ſee hovv agreable the vſe of the Churches ſeruice is euen at this time to the Scriptures and primitiue Church: and hovv vvicked the Puritan Caluiniſtes be, that count al ſuch order and ſet ſeaſons of praier, ſuperſtition: and laſtly, hovv inſufficient and vnlike the nevv pretended Church-ſeruice of England is to the primitiue vſe, vvhich hath no ſuch houres of night or day, ſauing a litle imitation of the old Mattins and Euenſong, and that in Schiſme and Hereſie, and therfore not onely vnprofitable, but alſo damnable. [Margin: Dan. 6. · Act. 3.]

⟨illegible⟩5. Adored.] S. Chryſoſtom ho. 21 in Act. thinketh Peter refuſed this adoration of humilitie only, becauſe euery falling dovvne to the g⟨illegible⟩ound for vvorſhip ſake, is not Diuine vvorſhip or dew only to God, the vvord of adoration and proſtration being commonly vſed in the Scriptures tovvard men. But S. Hierom adu. Vigil. c. 2 to. ⟨illegible⟩. rather thinketh that Cornelius by error of Gentility, and of Peters perſon, did go about to adore him vvith Diuine honour, and therfore vvas lifted vp by the Apoſtle, adding that he vvas but a man. [Margin: Adoration of creatures. · * ⟨non-Latin script⟩.]

40. Gaue him.] Chriſt did not vtter his Reſurrection and other myſteries to al at once, and immediatly to the vulgar: but to a fevv choſen men that ſhould be the gouernours of the reſt. inſtructing vs thereby to take our faith and al neceſſarie things of ſaluation, at the hands of our Superiors.

47. Baptized, vvhich haue receiued.] Such may be the grace of God ſometimes tovvard men, and their charitie and contrition ſo great, that they may haue remiſſion, iuſtification, and ſanctification before the external Sacrament of Baptiſme, Confirmation, or Penance be receiued. as vve ſee in this example, vvhere at Peters preaching they al receiue the Holy Ghoſt before any Sacrament. but in the ſame vve learne one neceſſarie leſſon, that ſuch notvvithſtanding muſt needes receiue the Sacraments appointed by Chriſt, vvhich vvhoſoeuer contemneth, can neuer be iuſtified. Aug. ſuper Leuit. q. ⟨illegible⟩4 to. 4. [Margin: They that are iuſtified before, muſt not omit the Sacraments.]

Chapter 11

The Chriſtian Ievves reprehend the foreſaid fact of Peter in baptizing the Gentils 4 But he alleaging his foreſaid vvarrants, and ſhevving plainly that it vvas of God, 1⟨illegible⟩ they like good Catholikes do yeld. 19 By the foreſaid perſecution, the Church is yet further dilated, not only into al Ievvrie, Galilee, and Samaria, but alſo into other Countries: ſpecially in Antiochia Syria the increaſe among the Greekes, is ⟨illegible⟩, firſt by the foreſaid diſperſed, 23 then by Barnabas, thirdly by him and Saul together: ſo that there beginneth the name of Chriſtians: 27 vvith perfite vnity betvvene them and the Church that vvas before them a⟨illegible⟩ Hieruſalem.

1 AND the Apoſtles and brethren that vvere in Ievvrie, heard that the Gentiles alſo receiued the vvord of God.

2 And vvhen Peter vvas come vp to Hieruſalem, they that vvere of the Circumciſion reaſoned againſt him, ſaying,

3 Vvhy didſt thou enter in to men vncircumciſed, and didſt eate vvith them?

4 But Peter began and declared to them the order, ſaying:

5 * I was in the citie of Ioppé praying, & I ſavv in an exceſſe of minde a viſion, a certaine veſſel deſcending as it vvere a great ſheete with foure corners let dovvne from heauen, and it came euen vnto me.

6 Into vvhich I looking cōſidered, and ſavv foure footed beaſtes of the earth, and cattel, and ſuch as creepe, and foules of the aire.

7 And I heard alſo a voice ſaying to me, Ariſe Peter, kil and eate.

8 And I ſaid, Not ſo Lord: for common or vncleane thing neuer entred into my mouth.

9 And a voice anſvvered the ſecond time from heauen: That vvhich God hath made cleane, doe not thou call common.

10 And this vvas done thriſe: and al vvere taken vp againe into heauen.

11 And behold, three men immediatly vvere come to the houſe vvherein I vvas, ſent to me from Caeſaréa.

12 And the ſpirit ſaid to me, that I ſhould goe vvith them, doubting nothing. And there came vvith me theſe ſixe brethren alſo: and vve vvent in to the mans houſe.

13 And he told vs, hovv he had ſeen an Angel in his houſe, ſtanding and ſaying to him, Send to Ioppé, and cal hither Simon, that is ſurnamed Peter,

14 vvho ſhal ſpeake to thee vvordes vvherein thou ſhalt be ſaued and al thy houſe.

15 And vvhen I had begonne to ſpeake, the holy Ghoſt fel vpon them, as vpō vs alſo in the beginning.

16 And I remembred the vvord of our Lord, according as he ſaid, Iohn in deede baptized vvith vvater, but you ſhal be baptized vvith the holy Ghoſt.

17 If therfore God hath giuen them the ſame grace, as to vs alſo that beleeued in our Lord IESVS CHRIST: vvho vvas I that might prohibite God?

18 Hauing heard theſe things, they held their peace: and glorified God, ſaying, God then to the Gentiles alſo hath giuen repentance vnto life.

19 * And they truely that had been diſperſed by the tribulation that vvas made vnder Steuen, vvalked through out vnto Phoenîce and Cypres & Antioche, ſpeaking the vvord to none, but to the Ievves only.

20 But certaine of them vvere men of Cypres and Cyréne, vvho vvhen they vvere entred into Antioche, ſpake to the Greekes, preaching our Lord IESVS.

21 And the hand of our Lord vvas vvith them: and a great number of beleeuers vvas conuerted to our Lord.

22 And the report came to the eares of the Church that vvas at Hieruſalem, touching theſe things: and they ſent * Barnabas as farre as Antioche.

23 Vvho vvhen he vvas come, and ſavv the grace of God, reioyced: and he exhorted al vvith purpoſe of hart to continevv in our Lord:

24 becauſe he vvas a good man, and ful of the holy Ghoſt and faith. And a great ″ multitude vvas added to our Lord.

25 And he vvent, forth to * Tarſus, to ſeeke Saul:

26 vvhom vvhen he had found, he brought him to Antioche. And they cōuerſed there in the church a vvhole yere: and they taught a great multitude, ſo that the diſciples vvere at Antioche firſt named ″ CHRISTIANS.

27 And in theſe daies there came Prophets from Hieruſalem to Antioche,

28 and one of them riſing, named Agabus, did by the Spirit ſignifie a great famine that ſhould be in the vvhole vvorld, vvhich fel vnder Claudius.

29 And the diſciples according as eche man had, purpoſed euery one to ſend, for to ſerue the brethren that dvvelt in Ievvrie:

30 vvhich alſo they did, ſending to the auncients by the handes of Barnabas and Saul.

Marginal notes to Chapter 11

v. 4 Act. 10, 9.
v. 16 Act. 1, 5.
v. 18 ⸬ Good Chriſtians heare and obey gladly ſuch truthes as be opened vnto them from God by their cheefe Paſtors, by viſion, reuelation, or otherwiſe.
v. 19 Act. 8, 1.
v. 20 The Epiſtle vpō S. Barnabees day Iun. 11.
v. 22 Act. 4, 36.
v. 25 Act. 9, 30.
v. 26 The name of CHRISTIANS.

Annotations to Chapter 11

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XI.

24. Multitude added.) As before (c. 10) a fevv, ſo novv great numbers of Gentiles are adioyned alſo to the viſible Church, conſiſting before only of the Ievves. Vvhich Church hath beene euer ſince Chriſts Aſcenſion, notoriouſly ſeen and knovven: their preaching open, their Sacraments viſible, their diſcipline viſible, their Heades and Gouernours viſible, the prouiſion for their maintenance viſible, the perſecution viſible, their diſperſion viſible: the Heretikes that vvent out from them, viſible: the ioyning either of men or Nations vnto them, viſible: their peace and reſt after perſecutions, viſible: their Gouernours in priſon, viſible: the Church praieth for them viſibly, their Councels viſible, their gifts and graces viſible, their name (Chriſtians) knovven to al the vvorld, of the Proteſtants inuiſible Church vve heare not one vvord. [Margin: The Church viſible.]

26. Chriſtians.) This name, Chriſtian, ought to be common to al the Faithful, and other nevv names of Schiſmatikes and Sectaries muſt be abhorred. If thou heare (ſaith S. Hierom) any vvhere, ſuch as be ſaid to be of Chriſt, not to haue their names of our Lord IESVS CHRIST, but to be called after ſome other certaine name, as Marcionites, Valentinians, (as novv alſo the Lutherans, Caluiniſts, Proteſtants) knovv thou that they belong not to the Church of Chriſt, but to the Synagogue of Antichriſt. Lactantius alſo (li. 7 Diuin. inſtit. c. 30) ſaith thus, when Phrygians, or Nouatians, or Valentinians, or Marcionites, or Anthropomorphites, or Arrians, or any other be named, they ceaſe to be Chriſtians, vvho hauing loſt the name of Chriſt, haue done on the names of men. Neither can our nevv Sectaries diſcharge them ſelues, for that they take not to them ſelues theſe names, but are forced to beare them as giuen by their Aduerſaries. For, ſo vvere the names of Arians and the reſt of old, impoſed by others, and not choſen commonly of them ſelues: Vvhich notvvithſtanding vvere callings that proued them to be Heretikes. And as for the name of Proteſtants, our men hold them vvel content therevvith. But concerning the Heretikes turning of the argument againſt the peculiar callings of our Religious, as Dominicās, Franciſcans, Ieſuites, Thomiſts, or ſuch like, it is nothing, except they could proue that the orders & perſons ſo named, were of diuers faithes & Sectes, or differed in any neceſſarie point of religion, or vvere not al of one Chriſtian name and Communion: and it is as ridiculous as if it vvere obiected, that ſome be Ciceronians, ſome Plinians, ſome good Auguſtine men, ſome Hieronymians, ſome Oxford mē, ſome Cambrige men, & (vvhich is moſt like) ſome * Rechabites, * Nazareite⟨illegible⟩. [Margin: Hierony. cont. Lucif c. 7. in fine. · Names of Sectaries and Heretikes. · Proteſtants. · Diuers religious orders are not diuers ſectes. · Ierem. 35. · Num. 6.]

Neither doth their obiection, that vve be called Papiſtes, helpe or excuſe them in their nevv names. for, beſides that it is by them ſcornfully inuented (as the name Homouſians vvas of the Arians) this name is not of any one man B. of Rome or els vvhere, knovven to be the author of any ſchiſme or ſect, as their callings be: but it is of a vvhole ſtate and order of gouernours, and that of the cheefe Gouernours, to vvhom vve are bound to cleaue in religion and to obey in al things. So to be a Papiſt, is to be a Chriſtian man, a childe of the Church, and ſubiect to Chriſts Vicar. And therfore againſt ſuch impudent Sectaries as compare the faithful for folovving the Pope, to the diuerſitie of Heretikes bearing the names of nevv Maiſters, let vs euer haue in readines this ſaying of S. Hierom to Pope Damaſus, Vitalis I knovv not, Meletius I refuſe, I knovv not Paulinus, whoſoeuer gathereth not vvith thee, ſcattereth: that is to ſay, whoſoeuer is not Chriſts, is Antichriſts. And againe, If any man ioyne vvith Peters Chaire, he is mine. [Margin: Papiſtes, Catholikes, and true Chriſtians, al one. · Not to be with the Pope, is to be with Antichriſt. · ⟨illegible⟩. ep. 37 & ep. 58 ad Damaſ.]

Vve muſt here further obſerue that this name, Chriſtian, giuen to al beleeuers and to the whole Church, vvas ſpecially taken to diſtinguiſh them from the Ievves and Heathens vvhich beleeued not at al in Chriſt, and the ſame novv ſeuereth and maketh knovven al Chriſtian men from Turkes and others that hold not of Chriſt at al. But vvhen Heretikes began to riſe from among the Chriſtians, vvho profeſſed Chriſts name and ſundry Articles of faith as true beleeuers doe, the name Chriſtian vvas to common to ſeuer the Heretikes from true faithful men: and therevpon the Apoſtles by the holy Ghoſt impoſed this name Catholike vpon the Beleeuers vvhich in al points vvere obedient to the Churches doctrine. When hereſies vvere riſen (ſaith S. Pacianus ep. ad Symphorianum) & endeuoured by diuers names to tears the doue of God and Queene, and to rent her in peeces, the Apoſtolical people required their ſurname, vvhereby the incorrupt people might be diſtinguiſhed. &c. and ſo thoſe that before vvere called Chriſtians, are novv ſurnamed alſo Catholikes. Chriſtian is my name, ſaith he, Catholike my ſurname. And this vvord, Catholike, is the proper note vvhereby the holy Apoſtles in their Crede taught vs to diſcerne the true Church from the falſe heretical congregation of vvhat ſort ſoeuer. And not only the meaning of the vvord, vvhich ſignifieth vniuerſalitie of times, places, and perſons, but the very name and vvord it ſelf, by Gods prouidence, alvvaies and only appropriated to the true beleuers, and (though ſometimes at the beginning of Sectes chalenged) yet neuer obtained by Heretikes, giueth ſo plaine a marke and euidence, that S. Auguſtine ſaid, In the lappe of the Church the very name of Catholike keepeth me. cont. ep. fund. c. 4. And againe tract. 32 in Io. vve receiue the Holy Ghoſt if vve loue the Church, if vve be ioyned together by charitie, if vve reioyce in the Catholike name and faith. And againe de ver. rel. c. 7. to. 1. We muſt hold the communion of that Church vvhich is named Catholike, not only of her ovvne, but alſo of al her enemies. for, vvil they nil they, the Heretikes alſo and Schiſmatikes them ſelues, vvhen they ſpeake not vvith their ovvne fellovves but vvith ſtrangers, call the Catholike Church nothing els but the Catholike Church: for they could not be vnderſtood vnles they diſcerne it by this name vvherevvith ſhe is called of al the vvorld. The Heretikes vvhen they ſee them ſelues preuented of this name Catholike, then they plainely reiect it and deride the name, as the Donatiſtes did, calling it an humane forgeris or fiction, vvhich S. Auguſtine calleth vvordes of blaſphemie, li. 1. c. 3⟨illegible⟩ cont. Gaudrat. and ſome Heretikes of this time call them ſcornefully cartholikes, and cacolikes. An other calleth it, the moſt vaine terme Catholike. Beza in praf. no. Teſt. an. 1565. An other calleth the Catholike religion, a Catholike Apoſtaſie or defection, Humfrey in vit. Iuel. pag. ⟨illegible⟩13. Yea and ſome haue taken the vvord out of the Crede, putting Chriſtian for it. But againſt theſe good fellovves let vs folovv that vvhich S. Auguſtine (de vtil. cred. c. 8. to. 6.) giueth as a rule to direct a mā the right and ſure vvay from the diuerſitie & doubtfulnes of al error, ſaying, If after theſe trouble of minde thou ſeeme to thy ſelf ſufficiently toſſed and vexed, & vvilt haue an end of theſe moleſtations, folovv the vvay of Catholike diſcipline, vvhich from Chriſt him ſelf by the Apoſtles hath proceded euen vnto vs, and ſhal procede from hence to the poſteritie. See the Annotation 1 Tim. 3, c. 15. [Margin: The name of CHRISTIANS. · The name of CATHOLIKES. · CREDO ECCLESIAM CATHOLICAM. · The Proteſtāts deride the name CATHOLIKE. · * In the Catechiſmes of the Lutherans.]

Chapter 12

Herod the firſt king that perſecuted the Church, hauing at Hieruſalem (vvhen Barnabas and Saul vvere there vvith the collation of the Antiochians) killed Iames the Apoſtle, 3 and to pleaſe the levves impriſoned Peter vvith the minde to kil him alſo, but fruſtrate by an Angel ſent of God at the continual praiers of the Church made for her cheefe Paſtor, 19 being puffed vp vvith ſuch pride that at Caſarea he refuſeth not to be honoured as God: 23 is miraculouſly ſtriken of Gods Angel. 24 And ſo after the perſecutors death, the Churches preaching proſpereth excedingly.

1 AND at the ſame time Herod the king ſet his hādes, to afflicte certaine of the Church.

2 And he killed Iames the brother of Iohn vvith the ſvvord.

3 And ſeing that it pleaſed the Ievves, he added to apprehend Peter alſo. And it vvas the daies of the Azymes.

4 Vvhom vvhen he had apprehended, he caſt into priſon, deliuering him to foure quaterniōs of ſouldiars to be kept, meaning after the Paſche to bring him forth to the people.

5 And Peter in deede vvas kept in priſon. But ″ praier vvas made of the Church vvithout intermiſſion vnto God for him.

6 And vvhen Herod vvould haue brought him forth, the ſame night Peter vvas ſleeping betvvene tvvo ſouldiars, bound vvith ″ tvvo chaines: and the keepers before the doore kept the priſon.

7 And behold an Angel of our Lord ſtoode in preſence: and light ſhined in the houſe: and ſtriking Peters ſide, he raiſed him, ſaying, Ariſe quickely. And the chaines fel from his handes.

8 And the Angel ſaid to him, Gird thee, and put on thy ſhoes. And he did ſo. And he ſaid to him, Put thy garment about thee, & folovv me.

9 And going forth he folovved him, & he knew not that it vvas true vvhich vvas done by the Angel: but he thought that he ſavv a viſion.

10 And paſſing through the firſt & the ſecond vvatch, they came to the yron gate that leadeth to the citie, vvhich of it ſelf opened to them. And going out, they vvent forvvard one ſtreate: and incontinent the Angel departed from him.

11 And Peter returning to him ſelf, ſaid: Novv I knovv in very deede that our Lord hath ſent his Angel, and deliuered me out of Herods hand, & from al the expectation of the people of the Ievves. ⊢

12 And conſidering, he came to the houſe of Marie the mother of Iohn, vvho vvas ſurnamed Marke, vvhere many vvere gathered and praying.

13 And vvhen he knocked at the doore of the gate, there came forth a vvenche to ſee, named Rhodè.

14 And as ſhe knew Peters voice, for ioy ſhe opened not the gate, but running in ſhe told that Peter ſtoode before the gate.

15 But they ſaid to her, Thou art mad. But ſhe affirmed that it vvas ſo. But they ſaid, It is ″ his Angel.

16 And Peter cōtinued knocking. And vvhē they had opened, they ſavv him, & vvere aſtonied.

17 And beckening vvith his hand to them, that they ſhould hold their peace, he told hovv our Lord had brought him out of priſon, and he ſaid, ″ Tel theſe things to Iames & to the brethren. And going forth he vvent into an other place.

18 And when day vvas come, there vvas no litle a doe betvvene the ſouldiars, vvhat vvas become of Peter.

19 And Herod, vvhen he had ſought him, and had not found, making inquiſitiō of the keepers, cōmaūded them to be led avvay: & going dovvne frō Ievvrie into Caeſaréa, there he abode.

20 And he vvas angrie vvith the Tyrians and the Sidonians. But they vvith one accord came to him, and perſuading Blaſtus that vvas cheefe of the kings chamber, they deſired peace, for that their countries vvere nouriſhed by him.

21 And vpon a day appointed, Herod being araied vvith kingly attire, ſate in the iudgement ſeate, and made an oration to them.

22 And the people made acclamation, The voices of a God, & not of a man.

23 And forthvvith an Angel of our Lord ſtrooke him, becauſe he had not giuen the honour to God: and being conſumed of vvormes, he gaue vp the ghoſt.

24 But the vvord of our Lord increaſed and multiplied.

25 And Barnabas and Saul returned from Hieruſalem, hauing accompliſhed their * miniſterie, taking vvith them Iohn that vvas ſurnamed Marke.

Marginal notes to Chapter 12

Argument The Epiſtle vpō ⟨illegible⟩ S. Peter and Paules day Iun. ⟨illegible⟩9.
v. 4 ⸬ As Peters perſon vvas more notorious then others, & therfore better garded then other, for feare he ſhould eſcape: ſo Gods prouidence in preſeruing & deliuering him for the longer gouernment of his Church, is very maruelous.
v. 12 ⸬ It is much for the praiſe of theſe good Chriſtians that the aſſemble to Gods ſeruice & praier was kept in their houſes in the time of perſecution, & that the Apoſtle came thither ſtraight out of priſon, as his firſt refuge, as now Chriſtian people doe much to their cōmendatiō, in places where Hereſie doth reigne.
v. 17 ⸬ Though God had ſo miraculouſly deliuered him, yet he would not tēpt God by ta⟨illegible⟩ying among his perſecutors, but accordīg to Chriſtes cōmaundement fled for a time.
v. 23 ⸬ Princes that take delite in the flattery and praiſes of the people, ſo much that they forget them ſelues to be mē, & to giue the honour to God, may be warned by this example.
v. 25 Act. 11, 29.

Annotations to Chapter 12

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XII.

5. Praier vvas made.] The Church praied inceſſantly for her cheefe Paſtor, and was heard of God: and al Chriſtian people are vvarned thereby to pray for their Biſhopes and Paſtors in priſon.

6. Tvvo chaines.] Theſe chaines are famous for miracles, and vvere brought from Hieruſalem to Rome by Eudoxia the Empereſſe, vvife to Theodoſius the yonger, vvhere they vvere matched & placed vvith an other chaine that the ſame Apoſtle vvas tied with by Nero, & a Church foūded therevpon, named Petri ad vincula, Vvhere they are religiouſly kept and reuerenced vntil this day, and there is a Feaſt in the vvhole Church for the ſame, the firſt of Auguſt, vvhich vve call, Lammas day. [Margin: S. Peters chaines.]

15. His Angel] If proper Angels (ſaith S. Chryſoſtom) be deputed by our Lord to ſuch as haue only charge of their ovvne life, (as one of the iuſt ſaid, * The Angel vvhich hath deliuered me from my youth vpvvard) much more are ſupernal Spirits at hand to helpe them vnto vvhom the charge and burden of the vvorld is committed. Chryſ. in laud. Pauli. ho. 7▪ to. 3. [Margin: Patronage of Angels. · Gen. 41, 16▪]

17. Tel Iames.] He vvilleth them to ſhevv this to S. Iames Biſhop of Hieruſalem and to the Chriſtians, that they might ſee the effect of their praiers for him, & giue God thankes, for S. Iames no doubt publiſhed cōmon praier for S. Peter. [Margin: Publike praier for S. Peter the head.]

Chapter 13

The preachers of the Church of Antioche preparing thēſelues, the Holy Ghoſt out of them al, chooſeth Saul and Barnabas. 3 They being firſt conſecrated Biſhops, 4 go⟨illegible⟩ their appointed circuite ouer al th⟨illegible⟩ land of Cypres, the Proconſul vvhereof is alſo conuerted, ſeing the miraculous excecation of a Ievv by Paul. 13 Thence, into Pamphilia: 14 and Piſidia, vvhere in Antioche Paul preacheth to the Ievves, ſhevving that IESVS is Chriſt, 38 and that in him is ſaluation, and not in their Lavv of Moyſes: 40 vvarning them to bevvare of the reprobation foretold by the Prophets▪ 44 But the next Sabboth, they blaſphening, he in plaine termes forſaketh them, and turneth to the Gentiles. Whereat the Gentils be as glad on the contrarie ſide. 50 Finally the Ievves raiſing perſecution, they forſake them, pronouncing them to be obſtinate contemners.

1 AND there vvere in the Church vvhich vvas at Antioche, Prophets and Doctors, among vvhom vvas Barnabas, & Simon that vvas called Niger, and Lucius of Cyréne, and Manahen vvho vvas the foſterbrother of Herod the Tetrarch, and Saul.

2 And as they vvere ″ miniſtring to our Lord, and faſting, the holy Ghoſt ſaid: ″ Separate me Saul and Barnabas vnto the vvorke, vvhereto I haue taken them.

3 Then they ″ faſting and praying, and ″ impoſing hands vpō them, dimiſſed them.

4 And they being ″ ſent of the holy Ghoſt, vvent to Seleucia, and thence ſailed to Cypres.

5 And vvhen they vvere come to Salamîna, they preached the vvord of God in the ſynagogs of the Ievves. And they had Iohn alſo in their miniſterie.

6 And vvhen they had vvalked through out the vvhole iland as farre as Paphos, they found a certaine man that vvas a magician, a falſe-prophete, a Ievv, vvhoſe name vvas Bar-ieſu',

7 vvho vvas vvith the Proconſul Sergius Paulus a vviſe man. He ſending for Barnabas & Saul, deſired to heare the vvord of God.

8 But Elymas the magician (for ſo is his name interpreted) reſiſted them, ſeeking to auert the Proconſul from the faith.

9 But Saul, othervviſe Paul, repleniſhed vvith the holy Ghoſt, looking vpon him,

10 ſaid: O ful of al guile, and al deceit, ſonne of the deuil, enemie of al iuſtice, thou ceaſeſt not to ſubuert the right vvaies of our Lord.

11 And novv behold the hand of our Lord vpon thee, and thou ſhalt be blind, not ſeing the ſunne vntil a time. And forthvvith there fel dimneſſe and darkeneſſe vpon him, and going about he ſought ſome body that vvould giue him his hand.

12 Then the Proconſul, vvhen he had ſeen that vvhich vvas done, beleeued, marueling at the doctrine of our Lord.

13 And vvhen Paul and they that vvere vvith him had ſailed from Paphos, they came to Pergè in Pamphylia. And Iohn depárting from them, returned to Hieruſalem.

14 But they paſſing through Pergè, came to Antioche in Piſidia: and entring into the ſynagogue on the day of the Sabboths, they ſate dovvne.

15 And after the leſſon of the Lavv and the Prophets, the princes of the Synagogue ſent to them, ſaying, Men brethren, if there be among you any ſermon of exhortation to the people, ſpeake.

16 And Paul riſing vp, and vvith his hand beckening for ſilence, ſaid, Ye men of Iſraël, and you that feare God, harken:

17 The God of the people of Iſraël choſe our fathers, and exalted the people vvhen they vvere ſeiourners in the land of Aegypt, and in a mightie arme brought them out thereof,

18 and for the ſpace of fourtie yeres tolerated their maners in the deſert.

19 And deſtroying ſeuen nations in the land of Chanaan, by lot he deuided their land among them,

20 as it vvere after foure hundred and fiftie yeres: and after theſe things he gaue Iudges, vntil Samuël the prophet.

21 And thenceforth they deſired a king: and he gaue them * Saul the ſonne of Cis, a man of the tribe of Beniamin, fourtie yeres.

22 and remouing him, he raiſed them vp * Dauid to be king: to vvhom giuing teſtimonie, he ſaid, I haue found Dauid the ſonne of Ieſſe, a man according to my hart, vvho ſhall doe al my vvilles.

23 Of his ſeede God according to his * promiſſe hath brought forth to Iſraël a Sauiour IESVS,

24 Iohn * preaching before the face of his comming, baptiſme of penance to al the people of Iſraël.

25 And vvhen Iohn fulfilled his courſe, he ſaid, Vvhom doe * you thinke me to be? I am not he, but behold there commeth after me, vvhoſe ſhoes of his feete I am not vvorthie to vnlooſe.

26 Men brethren, children of the ſtocke of Abraham, & they among you that feare God, to you the vvord of this ſaluation vvas ſent.

27 For they that inhabited Hieruſalem, and the princes thereof, not knovving him, nor the voices of the prophets that are read euery Sabboth, iudging haue fulfilled them,

28 and finding no cauſe of death in him, * deſired of Pilate, that they might kil him.

29 And vvhen they had cōſummated al things that vvere vvrittē of him, taking him dovvne from the tree, they put him in a monument.

30 But God raiſed him vp from the dead the third day:

31 vvho vvas * ſeen for many daies of them that came vp together vvith him from Galilee into Hieruſalem, vvho vntil this preſent are his vvitneſſes to the people.

32 And vve preach vnto you that promiſſe vvhich vvas made to our fathers:

33 that God hath fulfilled this ſame to our children', raiſing vp IESVS, as in the ſecond Pſalme alſo it is vvritten: My ſonne art thou, this day haue I begotten thee.

34 And that he raiſed him vp from the dead, not to returne novv any more into corruption, thus he ſaid, That I vvil giue you the holy things of Dauid faithful.

35 And therfore in an other place alſo he ſaith, Thou ſhalt not giue thy holy one to ſee corruption.

36 For Dauid in his generation vvhen he had ſerued, according to the vvil of God ſlept: and he vvas laid to his fathers & ſavv corruption.

37 But he vvhom God hath raiſed vp, ſavv no corruption.

38 Be it knovven therfore to you, men brethren, that through him, forgiueneſſe of ſinnes is preached to you, from al the things from the vvhich you could not be iuſtified by the lavv of Moyſes.

39 In him euery one that beleeueth, is iuſtified.

40 Take heede therfore leſt that come vpon you vvhich is ſpoken in the prophets,

41 See ye cōtemners, and vvonder, and periſh: becauſe I vvorke a vvorke in your daies, a vvorke vvhich you vvil not beleeue, if any man ſhal tel it you.

42 And they going forth, they deſired them that the Sabboth folovving they would ſpeake vnto them theſe wordes.

43 And vvhen the ſynagogue vvas dimiſſed, many of the Iewes, and of the ſtrangers ſeruing God, folovved Paul & Barnabas: vvho ſpeaking exhorted them to continue in the grace of God.

44 But the next Sabboth the vvhole citie almoſt aſſembled to heare the vvord of God.

45 And the Ievves ſeing the multitudes, vvere repleniſhed vvith enuy, & contradicted thoſe things vvhich vvere ſaid of Paul, blaſpheming.

46 Then Paul and Barnabas conſtantly ſaid, To you it behoued vs firſt to ſpeake the vvord of God: but becauſe you repell it, and iudge your ſelues vnvvorthie of eternal life: behold vve turne to the Gentils.

47 For ſo our Lord commaunded vs: I haue put thee to be the light of the Gentils: that thou maieſt be ſaluation vnto the vtmoſt of the earth.

48 And the Gentils hearing it, vvere glad, and glorified the vvord of our Lord: and there beleeued as many as vvere preordinate to life euerlaſting.

49 And the vvord of our Lord vvas ſpred through out the vvhole countrie.

50 But the Ievves ſtirred vp religious and honeſt vvomen, and the cheefe of the citie, and raiſed perſecution againſt Paul and Barnabas: and they did caſt them forth out of their coaſtes.

51 But they * ſhaking of the duſt of their fecte againſt them, came to Icónium.

52 The diſciples alſo vvere repleniſhed vvith ioy and vvith the holy Ghoſt.

Marginal notes to Chapter 13

Argument The 5 part.
Argument THE taking of the Goſpel avvay from the obſtinate Iewes, and geuing of it to the Gentils, by the miniſterie of Paul and Barnabas.
v. 2 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 6 ` Barieu▪
v. 17 Exod.
v. 18 Ioſue.
v. 20 Iud.
v. 21 1, Reg. 8.
v. 21 1. Reg. 16▪
v. 22 Pſ. 88, 21▪
v. 22 Pſa. 131, 11.
v. 23 Lu. 3, 3.
v. 25 Lu. 3, 15.
v. 26 The Epiſtle vpō Tueſday in Eaſter vveeke.
v. 27 Lu. 23, 1▪
v. 31 Act. 1, 3.
v. 33 ` to vs their children, Pſ. 2, 7.
v. 34 Eſa. 55, 3.
v. 35 Pſ. 15, 10▪
v. 40 Abac. 1, 5▪
v. 42 ᶜ the Gētiles deſired▪
v. 43 ᶜ deuout proſelytes,
v. 46 ⸬ The Ievves of their ovvne free vvil repelling the truth, are vnvvorthy of Chriſt and vvorthily forſaken: and the Gentils though they beleeued ſpecially by Gods grace and preordination, yet they beleeue alſo by their ovvne free vvil, vvhich ſtandeth vvel vvith Gods prouidence.
v. 47 Eſ. 46, 6▪
v. 50 Lu. 9, 5.

Annotations to Chapter 13

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XIII.

2. As they vvere miniſtring.] If vve ſhould, as our Aduerſaries do, boldly turne vvhat text vve liſt, and flee from one language to an other for the aduantage of our cauſe, vve might haue tranſlated for miniſtring, ſacrificing, for ſo * the Greeke doth ſignifie, and ſo Eraſmus tranſlated. yea vve might haue tranſlated, Saying Maſſe, for ſo they did: and the Greeke Fathers here of had their name, Liturgie, vvhich Eraſmus tranſlateth Maſſe, ſaying, Miſſa Chryſoſtomi. But vve keepe our text, as the tranſlators of the Scriptures ſhould do moſt religiouſly. [Margin: ⟨non-Latin script⟩ · The Apoſtles liturgie or Maſſe.]

2. Separate me.] Though Paul vvere taught by God him ſelf and ſpecially deſigned by Chriſt to be an Apoſtle, and here choſen by the Holy Ghoſt together vvith Barnabas, yet they vvere to be ordered, conſecrated, and admitted by men. Vvhich vvholy condemneth al theſe nevv rebellious diſordered ſpirites, that chalenge and vſurpe the office of preaching and other ſacred actions from heauen, vvithout the Churches admiſſion. [Margin: Gal. ⟨illegible⟩. · Paul & Barnabas are conſecrated by men.]

3. Faſting.] Hereof the Church of God vſeth and preſcribeth publike faſtes at the foure ſoléue times of giuing holy Orders (vvhich are our Imber daies) as a neceſſarie preparatiue to ſo great a vvorke▪ as S. Leo declareth by this place, naming it alſo an Apoſtolical tradition. See. S. Leo Ser. 9 de ieiuni⟨illegible⟩ 7 menſis, & Calixtus ep. 1. to. 1. Conc. Conc. Magunt. c. 34. 35. to 3. And this faſting vvas not faſting from ſinne, nor moral or Chriſtian temperance, as the Proteſtants ridiculouſly affirme, for ſuch faſting they vvere bound euer to keepe: but it vvas abſtinence for a time from al meates or from ſome certaine kindes of meates, vvhich vvas ioyned vvith praier and ſacrifice, and done ſpecially at ſuch ſeaſons as the Church preſcribed, of al together (as in Lent, the Imber daies, Friday, Saturday) and not vvhen euery man liſt, as Aërius and ſuch Heretikes did hold.. S. Auguſt. har. 53. [Margin: Imber daies. · * Leo ep. 81 c. 1. · Praeſcript times of faſts. · Epipha. in compend. · Leo ſer. 3 et 4 de ⟨illegible⟩ 7 menſis.]

3. Impoſing hands.] Becauſe al bleſſings and conſecrations vvere done in the Apoſtles time by the external ceremonie of impoſition of hands, diuers Sacraments vvere named of the ſame, ſpecially Confirmation, as is noted before, and holy Ordering or conſecrating Biſhops, Prieſts, and Deacons, and Subdeacons, as vve ſee here and els vvhere. In vvhich though there vvere many holy vvordes and ceremonies and a very ſolemne action: yet vvhatſoeuer is done in thoſe Sacraments, is altogether called Impoſition of hands: as vvhatſoeuer vvas done in the vvhole diuine myſterie of the B. Sacrament, is named fraction of bread. for the Apoſtles (as S. Denys Eccl. bier. c. 1 in fine vvriteth) purpoſely kept cloſe in their open ſpeaches and vvritings vvhich might come to the hands or eares of Infidels, the ſacred vvordes and actions of the Sacraments. And S. Ambroſe ſaith, in 1 Tim. c. 4. The impoſition of the hand is myſtical vvordes vvherevvith the elected is conformed and made apt to his function, receiuing authoritie (his conſcience bearing vvitnes) that he may be bold in our Lordes ſteed to offer ſacrifice to God. And S. Hierom, The impoſition of hand is the Ordering of Clerkes. Which is done by praier of the voice, and impoſition of the hand. And this is in ſome inferior orders alſo, but Paul and Barnabas vvere ordered to a higher function then inferior Prieſts, euen to be Biſhops through out al Nations. [Margin: Impoſition of handes. · Holy orders. · * Act. 2, 42▪ · Hiero. ⟨illegible⟩ c. 58 Eſa.]

4. Sent of the Holy Ghoſt.] Vvhoſoeuer be ſent by the Church, are ſent of the Holy Ghoſt, though in ſuch an extraordinarie ſort it be not done. Vvhereby vve ſee hovv far the Officers of our ſoules in the Church do paſſe the temporal Magiſtrates, vvho though they be of Gods ordinance, yet not of the Holy Ghoſts ſpecial calling. [Margin: Spiritual officers of out ſoules.]

Chapter 14

Naxt in Iconi⟨illegible⟩ they preach, vvhere many being conuerted of both ſortes, the obſtinate Ievves raiſe perſecution, 6 Then in the tovvnes of Lyca⟨illegible⟩nīa, vvhere the Heathen firſt ſeing that Paul had healed one borne lame, are hardly perſuaded but they are Gods. 18 but aftervvard, by the inſtigation of the malitious Ievves, they ſtone Paul, leauing him for dead. 20 And ſo hauing done their circuite, they returne the ſame vvay confirming the Chriſtians, and making Prieſts for euery Church. 2⟨illegible⟩ And being come home to Antioche in Syria, they report al to the Church there.

1 AND it came to paſſe at Iconium that they entred together into the ſynagogue of the Ievves, and ſo ſpake, that a very great multitude of Ievves and of the Greekes did beleeue.

2 But the Ievves that vvere incredulous, ſtirred vp and incenſed the hartes of the Gentils to anger againſt the brethren.

3 A long time therfore they abode, dealing confidently in our Lord, vvho gaue teſtimonie to the vvord of his grace, graunting ſignes and vvonders to be done by their handes.

4 And the multitude of the citie vvas deuided: and certaine of them in deede vvere vvith the Ievves, but certaine vvith the Apoſtles.

5 And vvhen the Gentils and the Ievves vvith their princes had made an aſſault, to vſe them contumeliouſly, and to ſtone them,

6 vnderſtanding it, they fled to the cities of Lycaónia, Lyſtra and Derbé, and the vvhole countrie about, and there they vvere euangelizing.

7 And a certaine man at Lyſtra impotent of his feete ſate there, lame from his mothers vvombe, that neuer had vvalked.

8 This ſame heard Paul ſpeaking. Vvho looking vpon him, and ſeeing that he had faith for to be ſaued,

9 he ſaid vvith a loud voice, Stand vp right on thy feete. And he leaped & vvalked.

10 And the multitudes vvhen they had ſeen vvhat Paul had done, lifted vp their voice in the lycaónian tongue, ſaying, Gods made like to men, are deſcended to vs.

11 And they called Barnabas, Iupiter: but Paul, Mercurie, becauſe he vvas the cheefe ſpeaker.

12 The Prieſt alſo of Iupiter that vvas before the citie, bringing oxen & garlands before the gates, vvould vvith the people ″ ſacrifice.

13 Vvhich thing vvhen the Apoſtles Barnabas & Paul heard, renting their coates, they leaped forth into the multitudes, crying

14 and ſaying, Ye men, vvhy doe you theſe things? Vve alſo are mortal, men like vnto you, preaching to you for to conuert from theſe vaine things, to the liuing God that made the heauen, and the earth, and the ſea, and al things that are in them:

15 vvho in the generations paſt ſuffred al the Gentils to goe their ovvne vvaies.

16 Hovvbeit he left not him ſelf vvithout teſtimonie, being beneficial from heauen, giuing raines, and fruiteful ſeaſons, filling our hartes vvith foode & gladnes.

17 And ſpeaking theſe things, they ſcarſe appeaſed the multitudes from ſacrificing to them.

18 But there came in certaine Ievves from Antioche and Icónium: and perſvvading the multitudes, and * ſtoning Paul, they drevv him out of the citie, thinking him to be dead.

19 But the diſciples compaſſing him round about, he riſing vp, entred into the citie, and the next day he vvent forth vvith Barnabas vnto Derbè.

20 And vvhen they had euangelized to that citie, and had taught many, they returned to Lyſtra and Icónium, and to Antioche:

21 confirming the hartes of the diſciples, and exhorting them to continue in the faith, and that by many tribulations vve muſt enter into the kingdom of God.

22 And vvhen they ″ had ordained to them ″ Prieſts in euery Church, and had praied vvith faſtings, they commended them to our Lord in vvhom they beleeued.

23 And paſſing through Piſidia, they came into Pamphylia,

24 and ſpeaking the vvord of our Lord in Pergé, they vvent dovvne into Attalia:

25 and from thēce they ſailed to Antioche, * vvhence they had been deliuered to the grace of God vnto the vvorke vvhich they accompliſhed.

26 And vvhen they vvere come, and ⟨illegible⟩ad aſſembled the Church, they reported vvhat great things God had done vvith them, & that he had opened a doore of faith to the Gentils.

27 And they abode no litle time vvith the diſciples.

Marginal notes to Chapter 14

v. 12 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 16 ⸬ The Heathen might by the daily benefites of God haue knovven him at the leaſt to haue beene their Creatour and only Lord, though the myſterie of our Redemption vvere not opened to them.
v. 18 2. Cor. 11, 25.
v. 22 ⸬ Vve ſee by this, firſt that SS. Paul & Barnabas vvere Biſhops, hauing here authoritie to giue holy Orders: ſecondly, that there vvas euen then a difference betwixt Biſhops and Prieſts, though the name in the primitiue Church vvas often vſed indifferently: laſtly, that alvvaies faſting & praying were preparatiues to the giuing of holy Orders.
v. 25 Act, 13, 2▪

Annotations to Chapter 14

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XIIII.

12. They vvould ſacrifice.) This loe is the diuine vvorſhip, conſiſting in external ſacrifice, and in acknovvledging the parties vvorſhipped to be gods vvhich * may be done to no man nor creature, and therfore the Apoſtles refuſe it vvith al poſſible diligence, and al the Angels and Saincts in heauen refuſe that adoration by ſacrifice. The Catholike Church ſuffereth no Prieſt nor other ſo to vvorſhip any Sainct in heauen or earth. She hath but one external Sacrifice, vvhich is in the holy Maſſe, of Chriſts body and bloud: that ſhe offereth to God alone, and neither to Peter nor to Paul (ſaith S. Auguſtine) though the Prieſt that ſacrificeth ſtandeth ouer their bodies, and offereth in their memories. But other kindes of honours and dueties, inferior vvithout al compariſon (hovv great ſo euer they be) to this, vve do, as the Scriptures and Nature teache vs, to al Superiors in heauen and earth, according to the degrees of grace, honour, and bleſſednes that God hath called them vnto, from our B. Ladie Chriſts ovvne mother, to the leſt ſeruant he hath in the vvorld, for vvhich the Heretikes vvould neuer accuſe Chriſtian people of Idolatrie, if they had either grace, learning, faith, or natural affection. [Margin: Aug. li. 10. de Ciu. Dei. ⟨illegible⟩. 1. · ⟨illegible⟩. · Aug. li. 8. de Ciu. 6. 27. · Dulta.]

⟨illegible⟩. Had ordained.) The Heretikes, to make the vvorld beleeue that al Prieſts ought to be choſen by the voices of the people, and that they neede no other Ordering or Conſecration by Biſhops, preſſing the pro⟨illegible⟩ane vſe of the * Greeke vvord more then the very natural ſignification requireth and Eccleſiaſtical vſe beareth, tranſlate thus, Ordained by election. Vvhereas in deede this vvord in Scripture ſignifieth, Ordering by impoſition of hands, as is plaine by other vvordes equiualent, Act. 6, 13. 1 Tim. 4. ⟨illegible⟩. 2 Tim. 1. Vvhere the Ordering of Deacons, Prieſts, and others is called * Impoſition of hands: not of the people, but of the Apoſtles. And this to be the Eccleſiaſtical vſe of the vvord, appeareth by S. Hierom ſaying (as is before alleaged) that ⟨non-Latin script⟩ i⟨illegible⟩ the Ordering of Clerkes or Clergie men by praier of voice and impoſition of hand. [Margin: ⟨non-Latin script⟩ · Heretical tranſlation againſt holy orders. · ⟨non-Latin script⟩. · Hiero. in 11. Eſa.]

⟨illegible⟩. Prieſts.) Euen ſo here alſo, as before, fleing from the proper, apt, knovven, vvord & vvhich is moſt preciſely correſpondent to the very Greeke in our tongue and al nations, they tranſlate for Prieſt, Elder, that is, for a calling of Office, a vvord of age: for a terme of art and by conſent of al the Church and Apoſtolike authoritie and Fathers, appropriated to holy Order, a vulgar, common, and profane terme: Vvith as litle grace as if they ſhould tranſlate Pontificem, a bridgemaker, the Maior of London, the Bigger of London. And thus you ſee vvithin three vvordes compaſſe they flee guilefully from the Latin to the Greeke, and againe guilefully from the Greeke to the vulgar Engliſh. Such corruption of Scriptures their hatred of Prieſthod driueth them vnto. If they had tranſlated it ſo vvhen the Scriptures vvere firſt vvritten, (at vvhich time the vvord vvas but nevvly receiued into the ſpecial and Eccleſiaſtical ſignification, and vvhen it vvas yet taken ſometimes in common profane ſort, as 1 Tim. 5. or there only vvhere our aūcient Latin verſion turneth Presbyter into Senior, becauſe the vvord vvas not yet vvholy and only appropriated to holy Orders, as aftervvard by vſe of many hundred yeres it vvas and is) their dealing might haue had ſome colour of honeſt⟨illegible⟩e and plaineſſe, vvhich novv can not be but of plaine falſhod and corruption, and that of further purpoſe then the ſimple can ſee. Vvhich is to take avvay the office of Sacrificing and other functions of Prieſts, proper in the nevv Teſtamēt to ſuch as the Apoſtles often, and the poſteritle in maner altogether call Prieſts, Presbyteros. Vvhich vvord doth ſo certainely imply the authoritie of ſacrificing, that it is by vſe made alſo the onely Engliſh of Sacerdos, the Aduerſaries them ſelues as vvel as vve, ſo tranſlating it in al the old and nevv Teſtament: though they can not be ignorant that Prieſt commeth of Presbyter, and not of Sacerdos: and that antiquitie for no other cauſe applied the ſignification of Presbyter to Sacerdos, but to ſhevv that Preſbyter is in the nevv Lavv, that vvhich Sacerdos vvas in the old: the Apoſtles abſtaining from this and other like old names at the firſt, and rather vſing the vvordes, Biſhops, Paſtors, and Prieſts, becauſe they might be diſtinguiſhed from the Gouernours and ſacrificers of Aarons order, vvho as yet in the Apoſtles time did their old functions ſtill in the Temple. And this to be true, and that to be a Prieſt, is to be a man appointed to ſacrifice, the Heretikes them ſelues calling Sacerdos alvvaies a Prieſt, muſt needes be driuen to confeſſe. Although their folly is therein notorious, to apply vvillngly the vvord Prieſt to Sacerdos, and to take it from Presbyter vvhereof it is properly deriued, not only in Engliſh, but in other languages both french and Italian. Vvhich is to take avvay the name that the Apoſtles and fathers gaue to the Prieſts of the Church, & to giue it vvholy & onely to the order of Aaron, vvhich neuer had it before our Prieſthod began. Neuer did there Heretikes ſtand ſo much vpon doubtful deriuations and deſcant of vvordes as theſe Proteſtants do, and yet neuer men behaued them ſelues more fondly in the ſame: as vvhoſoeuer marketh the diſtinction of their Elders, Miniſters, Deacons, and ſuch like, ſhal perceiue. [Margin: Heretical trāſlation againſt Prieſthod. · If Sa⟨illegible⟩rdos. be a Prieſt, much more Preſbyter. · Preſbyter. · Prieſt. · Preb⟨illegible⟩re. · Preti.]

Chapter 15

Some of thoſe Ievves alſo that vvere Chriſtians, do fall, and are authors of the Hereſie of Iudaizing. 2 They referre the matter to Councel: 7 Wherein after great diſputation, Peter ſtriking the ſtroke, 12 and other confirming his ſentence vvith miracles, 13 and vvith Scriptures: 22 and the Apoſtles and Prieſts do vvrite and cōma⟨illegible⟩nd in the name of the Holy Ghoſt vvhat is to be done. 30 And the faithful thereby are ſtraightvvaies quieted in minde. 36 After vvhich, Paul and Barnabas thinking to goe againe their aboue ſaid circuite together, are by occaſion of Marke parted, to the greater increaſe of the Church.

1 AND certaine comming dovvne from Ievvrie, taught the brethren: That * vnles you be circumciſed according to the maner of Moyſes, you can not be ſaued.

2 No litle ſedition therfore being riſen to Paul and Barnabas againſt them, they ″ appointed that Paul and Barnabas ſhould goe vp, & certaine others of the reſt', to the Apoſtles and prieſts vnto Hieruſalem, vpon this queſtion.

3 They therfore being brought on their vvay by the Church, paſſed through Phoenîce and Samaria, reporting the conuerſion of the Gentiles: and they made great ioy to al the brethren.

4 And vvhen they vvere come to Hieruſalem, they vvere receiued of the Church and of the Apoſtles and Auncients, declaring vvhatſoeuer God had done vvith them.

5 And there aroſe certaine of the hereſie of the Phariſees that beleeued, ſaying, That they muſt be circumciſed, commaunded alſo to keepe the lavv of Moyſes.

6 And the ″ Apoſtles and Auncients ″ aſſembled to conſider of this vvord.

7 And vvhen there vvas made a great diſputation, ″ Peter riſing vp ſaid to them, Men brethren, you knovv that * of old daies God among vs ″ choſe, that by my mouth the Gentiles ſhould heare the vvord of the Goſpel, and beleeue.

8 And God vvhich knovveth the hartes, gaue teſtimonie, * giuing vnto them the holy Ghoſt as vvel as to vs,

9 and hath put no difference betvvene vs and them, by faith purifying their hartes.

10 Novv therfore vvhy tempt you God, to put a yoke vpon the neckes of the diſciples, vvhich neither our fathers nor vve haue been able to beare?

11 but by the grace of our Lord IESVS CHRIST vve beleeue to be ſaued, in like maner as they alſo.

12 And al the multitude held their peace: and they heard Barnabas and Paul telling vvhat great ſignes and vvonders God had done among the Gentiles by them.

13 And after they held their peace, ″ Iames anſvvered, ſaying, Men brethren, heare me.

14 Simon hath told hovv God firſt viſited to take of the Gentiles a people to his name.

15 And to this accord the vvordes of the prophets, as it is vvritten:

16 After theſe things I vvil returne, and vvil reedifie the tabernacle of Dauid▪ vvhich vvas fallen, and the ruines thereof I vvil reedifie, and ſet it vp:

17 that the reſidue of men may ſeeke after the Lord, and al nations vpon vvhom my name is inuocated, ſaith the Lord that doeth theſe things.

18 To our Lord vvas his ovvne vvorke knovven from the beginning of the vvorld.

19 For the vvhich cauſe ″ I iudge, that they vvhich of the Gentiles are conuerted to God, are not to be diſquieted,

20 but to vvrite vnto them that they refraine them ſelues from the contaminations of Idols, and ″ fornication, and ſtrangled things, and bloud.

21 For Moyſes of old times hath in euery citie them that preach him in the ſynagogs, vvhere he is read euery Sabboth.

22 Then it pleaſed the Apoſtles and Auncients vvith the vvhole Church, to choſe men out of them, & to ſend to Antioche vvith Paul and Barnabas, Iudas, vvho vvas ſurnamed Barſabas, & Silas, cheefe men among the brethren,

23 vvriting by their handes. The Apoſtles and Auncients, the brethren, to the brethren of the Gentiles that are at Antioche and in Syria and Cilicia, greeting.

24 Becauſe vve haue heard that certaine ″ going forth from vs, haue troubled you vvith vvordes, ſubuerting your ſoules, to vvhom vve gaue no commaundement:

25 It hath pleaſed vs being gathered in one, to choſe out men and to ſend them vnto you vvith our deereſt Barnabas and Paul,

26 men that haue giuen their liues for the name of our Lord IESVS CHRIST:

27 Vve haue ſent therfore Iudas & Silas, vvho them ſelues alſo vvil in vvordes report vnto you the ſame things.

28 For it hath ſeemed good ″ to the holy Ghoſt & to vs, to lay no further burden vpon you then theſe neceſſarie things:

29 that you abſteine from the things immolated to Idols, and bloud, and that vvhich is ſtrangled, and fornication, from the vvhich things keeping your ſelues, you ſhal doe vvell. Fare ye vvel.

30 They therfore being dimiſſed vvent dovvne to Antioche: and gathering the multitude, deliuered the epiſtle.

31 Vvhich vvhen they had read, they ″ reioyced vpon the conſolation:

32 but Iudas and Silas, them Selues alſo being prophets, vvith many vvordes comforted the brethren, and confirmed them.

33 And hauing ſpent ſome time there, they vvere vvith peace dimiſſed of the brethren vnto them that had ſent them.

34 But it ſeemed good vnto Silas to remaine there: and Iudas departed alone:

35 and Paul and Barnabas taried at Antioche, teaching and euangelizing vvith many others the vvord of our Lord.

36 And after certaine daies, Paul ſaid to Barnabas, Let vs returne and viſite our brethren in al cities vvherein vve * haue preached the vvord of our Lord, hovv they doe.

37 And Barnabas vvould haue taken vvith them Iohn alſo that vvas ſurnamed Marke.

38 But Paul deſired that he (as vvho * had departed from them out of Pamphylia, and had not gone vvith them to the vvorke) might not be receiued.

39 And there roſe a ″ diſſention, ſo that they departed one from an other, & that Barnabas in deede taking Marke ſailed to Cypres.

40 But Paul choſing Silas departed, being deliuered of the brethren to the grace of God.

41 And he vvalked through Syria and Cilicia, confirming the Churches: Commaunding them to keepe the praecepts of the Apoſtles and the Auncients.

Marginal notes to Chapter 15

v. 1 Gal. 5, 2.
v. 2 ` them,
v. 2 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 4 ᶜ Aūcients here, & often in this chapter, are the ſame that Prieſtes verſ. 2 as S. Hierom taketh it alſo 1 Pet. 5. & the greeke approueth, being alvvaies one, ⟨non-Latin script⟩, Prieſts. Hiero. in 1 ad Tit. et 4 ad Galat.
v. 4 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 7 ᵇ See the Annot. verſ. 28 toward the ende.
v. 7 Act. 10, 20.
v. 8 Act. 10, 45.
v. 9 ⸬ By that faith which worketh by charitie▪ for a dead faith can not purifie the hart of man, See chap. 16, 31.
v. 15 Amos. 9, 11.
v. 23 ᶜ Other latin copies and the greeke read thus writing by their handes an epiſtle cont⟨illegible⟩ining theſe things.
v. 36 ⸬ Hereof our Catholike Biſhops tooke vp the neceſſarie vſe of often viſiting their flockes & cures cōmitted to their charge, for confirmatiō in faith & vertue, & reformatiō of maners both of clergie & laitie.
v. 36 Act. 13, 14.
v. 37 Act. 13, 13.
v. 41 ⸬ Not only the things cōmaunded by Chriſtes expreſſe vvord, or vvritten in the Scriptures (as our Heretikes hold) but vvhatſoeuer the Apoſtles and Rulers of the Church commaund, is to be kept & obeied. See theſe wordes repeated againe c. 16, 4. & that in the greeke, leſt any man cauil, becauſe here the greeke hath them not.

Annotations to Chapter 15

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XV.

1. Appointed] Vve learne by this example, vvhat is to be done vvhen any controuerſie ariſeth in religion betvvene the teachers or other Chriſtian people. Vve ſee it is not ynough to contend by allegations of Scriptures or other proofes ſeeming to make for either part: for ſo of contentious part taking there ſhould be no end, but the more vvriting, vvreſtling, ſtriuing there vvere, euery one for his ovvne fanſie, cloking it vvith the title of Gods vvord and Scripture, the more Schiſmes, Sectes, and diuiſions vvould fall: as vve ſee ſpecially in the reſtles Hereſies of our time. Vvhoſe fa⟨illegible⟩tors admitting no iudges, ſtand to no trial of mortal men, to no tribunal of Pope, Councels, Biſhops, Synodes, but eche man to his ovvne phantaſtical ſpirit, his ovvne ſenſe of Scriptures, and his ovvne vvilful obdurate rebellion againſt Gods Church and his Superiors in the ſame. But here vve ſee S. Paul and Barnabas, men that vvere Apoſtles and ful of the Spirit of God, and the other parties, though neuer ſo much partial to the ceremonies of their Lavv by their former long vſe and education therein, yet not to ſtand ſtifly to their ovvne opinion on either ſide, but to condeſcend to referre the vvhole controuerſie and the determination thereof to the Apoſtles▪ Prieſts or Auncients of Hieruſalem, that is to ſay, to commit the matter to be tried by the heads and Biſhops and their determination in Councel. This is Gods holy and vviſe prouidence among other iudgements in his Church, to keepe the Chriſtian people in truth and vnitie, and to condemne ſectes and falſe teachers and troublers of the Church. By vvhich iudgements and order, vvhoſoeuer vvil not or dare not be tried in al their doctrine and doings, they ſhevv them ſelues to miſtruſt their ovvne cauſe, and to flee from the light, and ordinance of God▪ Vvithout vvhich order of appeaſing al differences in faith and conſtructions of the Scriptures, the Church had beene more defectual and inſufficient, then any Commonvvealth or Societie of men in the vvorld: none of vvhich euer vvanteth good meanes to decide al diſcordes and diſſenſion ariſing among the ſubiects & citizens of the ſame. [Margin: The way to end diſſenſion in religion, is to cōmit it to a Coūcel.]

6. Apoſtles and Auncients.] The Hereſies of our Proteſtants vvhich vvould haue al men to giue voice, or to be preſent in Councels, and of others that vvould haue none but the holy or elect to be admitted, are refuted by this example, vvhere vve ſee none but Apoſtles & Prieſts or Ancients aſſembled to diſpute of the matter, though many deuout people vvere in the citie the ſame time. Neither did euer any other in the Auncient Councels of the Church aſſemble to debate and define the matter, but ſuch, though many other for other cauſes be euer preſent. Secular men or vvomen, be their gifts neuer ſo great, can not be iudges in cauſes of faith and religion. If any thing, ſaith God ⟨illegible⟩e hard and doubtful, thou ſhalt come to the Prieſts of the Leuitical ſtocke, and thou ſhalt folovv their ſentence. Againe, The lippes of the Prieſt ſhal keepe knovvledge, and the Lavv thou ſhalt require of his mouth. Againe, Aſke the Lavv of the Prieſt. Much more muſt vve referre al to our Biſhops and Paſtors, vvhom God hath placed in the regiment of the Church vvith much larger priuilege, then euer he did the old Prieſts ouer the Synagogue. to vvhom it is ſaid, He that deſpiſeth you, deſpiſeth me. And it is to be noted that the Biſhops ſo gathered in Councel, repreſent the vvhole Church, haue the authoritie of the vvhole Church, and the Spirit of God to protect them from error, as the vvhole Church: SS. Paul and Barnabas come hither for the definition of the vvhole Church. The ſentence of a plenarie or general Councel (ſaith S. Auguſtine) is the conſent of the vvhole Church. And ſo it muſt needes be in the Church, becauſe the Magiſtrates, Senate, Councel or deputies of al commonvvealthes, repreſent the vvhole body: and to haue it othervviſe (as the Churches Rebels vviſh) vvere to bring al to hel and horrour, and them ſelues to be perpetually, by the ſeditious and popular perſons, vpholden againſt Lavv, reaſon, and religion, in their vvickednes. [Margin: Of vvhat perſons a Councel conſiſteth. · Deut. ⟨illegible⟩ · Mal. 2, 7. · Agga. 2, 12. · A general Coūcel repreſenteth the vvhole Church. · Luc. 10, 16 · li. 1. c. 1⟨illegible⟩. de bapt.]

⟨illegible⟩. Aſſembled.] A Councel vvas called to diſcuſſe the matter. vvhich Councel vvas the more eaſily gathered, becauſe the Chriſtian Biſhops and countries vvere not yet ſo many, but that the principal Gouernours of the Church being not far diſperſed, and as many learned men as vvere neceſſarie, might be in Hieruſalem, or eaſily called thither. And it vvas not a Prouincial Councel or Synode only, but a general Councel, conſiſting of the cheefe Apoſtles and Biſhops that then vvere, though the number vvas nothing ſo great as aftervvard vſed to aſſemble, vvhen the Church vvas ſpred into al nations. [Margin: The firſt Councel at Hieruſalem.]

7. Peter riſing vp.] S. Peter as the head of the Church ſpeaketh firſt, as his Succeſſors haue euer had, not only in their perſonal preſence, but in their abſence by their legates and ſubſtitutes, the cheefe voice in al Councels general, none euer receiued into authoritie and credite in the Church vvithout their Confirmation. And therefore the Councels of the Arians and of other Heretikes, vvere they neuer ſo great, vvanting the Popes aſſent, aſſiſtance, or Confirmation, did ſhamfully erre, as Ariminenſe for the Arians, and Epheſinum ſecundum for the Neſtorians, and ſuch like condemned Aſſemblies. [Margin: Peter head of the Councel, & his ſucceſſors after him.]

7. Choſe that by my mouth.] Though Paul vvere called and appointed ſpecially to be the Apoſtle of the Gentils, yet that vvas S. Peters ſpecial priuilege by Gods ovvne choiſe, that the firſt Gentils ſhould be called by his mouth, and that he firſt ſhould vtter to the Church that truth of the admiſſion of the Gentils him ſelf, for that he vvas Chriſtes Vicar, being notvvithſtanding (as his Maiſter vvas) Miniſter Circunciſionis, that is, Apoſtle of the Ievves, Chriſt deferring al preeminence vnto him in that point alſo. [Margin: Peters preeminence both toward Iewes & Gentiles. · Ro. 15, 8. · Gal. 2, 7.]

1⟨illegible⟩. Iames.] S. Iames becauſe he vvas an Apoſtle and alſo Biſhop of Hieruſalem, gaue his ſentence next. for the ſpeache interpoſed of SS. Paul and Barnabas, vvas but for their better information in the deciſion of the matter, and for confirmation of S. Peters ſentence, though they being Apoſtles, and Biſhops, had voices in the Councel alſo: as many m⟨illegible⟩ had, though their ſentences be not heare reported. And vvhere S. Iames in his ſpeach ſaith, I iudge, it is not meant that he gaue the principal definitiue ſentence: for he (as al the reſt) folovved and allovved the ſentēce of S. Peter, as it is plaine in the text, the vvhole aſſembly for reuerence of his perſon and approbation of his ſentence, holding their peace. Al the multitude (ſaith S. Hierom) held their peace, and into his ſentence Iames the Apoſtle & al the Prieſts did paſſe together. For though S. Iames did particulariſe certaine points incident to the queſtion debated, as of eating ſtrangled meates &c. yet the proper controuerſie for vvhich the Councel aſſembled, vvas, Vvhether the Gentils conuerted vvere bound to obſerue the Lavv of Moyſes. and it vvas concluded, that they vvere not bound, nor ought not to be charged vvith Moyſes Lavv or the Sacraments and ceremonies of the ſame. this is the ſubſtance and principal purpoſe of this Councels decree, vvhich doth binde for euer: and Peter (ſaith S. Hierom in the ſame place) vvas Prince or author of this decree, the matter of fornication and Idolothytes being but incident to the queſtion or reſolution, and the forbidding of eating ſtrangled and bloud, but a temporal prohibition, vvhich by the conſent of the Church or othervviſe aftervvard vvas abrogated, the Church of God hauing the true ſenſe of difference of times, place, & perſons, vvhen and hovv far ſuch things are to be obſerued, and vvhen not. And in ſuch things as theſe, and in other like vvhich according to circunſtances require alteration, it is, that S. Auguſtine ſaith, li. 2 de bapt. c. 3. to. 7. The former general or plenarie Councels may be amended by the later. [Margin: S. Iames and the reſt folow S. Peters ſentence. · Hiero. to. 2. ep. 89 ad Auguſt. C. 2. · The principal queſtion. · Incident queſtions. · How later coūcels alter the former.]

⟨illegible⟩. Fornication.] Fornication and contamination vvith Idols, are of them ſelues mortal ſinnes, and therfore can neuer be lavvful: yet becauſe the Gentiles by cuſtome vvere prone to both, and of fornication made very ſmal account, it pleaſed the Holy Ghoſt to forbid both ſpecially. Concerning the other points of abſteining from bloud and ſtiffled meates, they vvere things of their ovvne nature indifferent, in vvhich for a time the Ievves vvere to be borne vvithal, and the Gentils to b⟨illegible⟩ a litle exerciſed to obedience. By vvhich vve may ſee the great authoritie of Gods Church and Councels, vvhich may commaund for euer, or for a time, ſuch things as be fitte for the ſtate of times and nations, vvithout any expreſſe Scriptures at al, and ſo by commaundement make things neceſſarie that vvere before indifferent. [Margin: The Churches authoritie in making Decrees.]

24. Going forth from vs.] A proper diſcription or note of Heretikes, Schiſmatikes, and ſeditious teachers, to go out from their ſpiritual Paſtors and Gouernours, and to teach vvithout their commiſſion and approbation, to diſquiet the Catholike people vvith multitude of vvordes and ſvveete ſpeaches, and finally to ouerthrovv their ſoules. [Margin: Going out, a marke of heretikes.]

28. To the Holy Ghoſt and to vs.] By this firſt vve note, that it is not ſuch a fault as the Heretikes vvould make it in the ſight of the ſimple, or any incongruitie at al, to ioyne God and his creatures, as the principal cauſe and the ſecondarie, in one ſpeache, and to attribute that to both, vvhich though diuerſely, yet procedeth of both. God and you, ſay good people commonly: God and our Ladie, Chriſt and S. Iohn: We confeſſe to God and to Peter and Paul. as, God and his Angel, To our Lord and Gedeon, The ſvvord of our Lord and of Gedeon, Our Lord and Moyſes, Chriſt and his Angels. Our Lord and al Saincts. ep. ad Philem. S. Paul and our Lord, 1 Theſ. 1, 6. Al theſe ſpeaches being partly Scriptures, partly like vnto the Scriptures ſpeaches, are vvarrāted alſo by this Councel, vvhich ſaith boldly, & hath giuen the forme thereof to al other Councels lavvfully called and confirmed, to ſay the like, It hath pleaſed the Holy Ghoſt and vs. S Cyprian ep. 54. nu. 2. reporting the like of a Synode holden in Afrike, ſaith, It hath pleaſed vs by the ſuggeſtion of the Holy Ghoſt. [Margin: God & our Ladie, and the like ſpeaches. · * Gen. 48, 15. 16. · Iud. 7▪ 18. 20. · Exod. 14, 31. · VISVM EST Sp. ſancto & nobis. · 1. Tim. 5, ⟨illegible⟩1.]

Secondly vve note, that the holy Councels lavvfully kept for determination or cleering of doubtes, or condemning of errors and Hereſies, or appeaſing of Schiſmes and troubles, or reformation of life, and ſuch like important matters, haue euer the aſſiſtance of Gods Spirit, and therfore can not erre in their ſentences and determinations concerning the ſame, becauſe the Holy Ghoſt can not erre, from vvhom (as you ſee here) ioyntly vvith the Councel the reſolution procedeth. [Margin: The holy Ghoſt aſſiſtant in al lawful coūcels, to the vvorlds end, and that by Chriſts promiſſe.]

Thirdly vve learne, that in the holy Councels ſpecially (though othervviſe and in other Tribunals of the Church it be alſo verified) Chriſtes promes is fulfilled, * that the Holy Ghoſt ſhould ſuggeſt them and teach them al truth, and that not in the Apoſtles time only, but to the vvorldes end for ſo long ſhal Councels, the Church, and her Paſtors haue this priuilege of Gods aſſiſtance, as there be either doubtes to reſolue, or Heretikes to condemne, or truthes to be opened, or euil men to be reformed, or Schiſmes to be appeaſed. for vvhich cauſe S. Gregorie li. 1 ep. 24 ſub fin. reuerenceth the foure general Councels (Nicen, Conſtantinop, Epheſ, Chalced.) as the foure bookes of the holy Goſpel, alluding to the number: and of the fifth alſo he ſaith that he doth reuerence it alike: and ſo vvould he haue done moe, if they had beene before his time, vvho ſaith of them thus, Whiles they are concluded and made by vniuerſal conſent, him ſelf doth he deſtroy, and not them, vvhoſoeuer preſumeth either to looſe whom they binde, or to binde, vvhom they looſe. [Margin: Io. 16, 1⟨illegible⟩. · S. Gregories reuerence of General Councels.]

S. Gregorie therfore reuerencing al fiue alike, it may be marueled vvhence the Heretikes haue their fond difference betvvixt thoſe foure firſt and other later: attributing much to them, and nothing to the reſt. Vvhereas in deede the later can erre no more then the firſt foure, being holden and approued as they vvere, and hauing the Holy Ghoſt as they had. But in thoſe firſt alſo vvhen a man findeth any thing againſt their Hereſies (as there be diuers things) then they ſay plainely that they alſo may erre, and that the Holy Ghoſt is not tied to mens voices, nor to the number of ſentences: Vvhich is directly to reproue this firſt Councel alſo of the Apoſtles, and Chriſtes promes of the Holy Ghoſts aſſiſtance to teach al truth. Yea that you may knovv and abhorre theſe Heretikes throughly, heare ye vvhat a principal Sect-Maiſter vvith his blaſphemous mouth or penne vttereth, ſaying, that In the very beſt times ſuch vvas partly the ambition of Biſhops, partly their foliſhnes and ignorance, that the very blind may eaſily perceiue, Satan verily to haue beene preſident of their aſſemblies. Good Lord deliuer the people and the vvorld from ſuch blaſphemous tongues and bookes, and giue men grace to attend to the holy Scriptures and Doctors, that they may ſee hovv much, not only S. Auguſtine and other fathers attribute to al general Councels ſpecially, (to vvhich they referre them ſelues in al doubtes among them ſelues and in al their controuerſies vvith Heretikes:) but to vvhich euen S. Paul him ſelf (ſo ſpecially taught by God) and others alſo yelded them ſelues. Notorious is the ſaying of S. Auguſtine concerning S. Cyprian, Vvho being a bleſſed Catholike Biſhop and Martyr, yet erred about the rebaptizing of ſuch as vvere Chriſtened by Heretikes. If he had liued (ſaith S. Auguſtine li. 2 de bapt c. 4,) to haue ſeen the determination of a plenarie Councel, vvhich he ſavv not in his life time, he vvould for his great humilitie and charitie ſtraight vvay haue yelded, and preferred the general Councel before his ovvne iudgement and his fellovv Biſhops in a Prouincial Councel only. Vvhereby alſo vve learne, that Prouincial Councels may erre, though many times they do not, and being conformable to the general Councels, or confirmed and allovved by them or the See Apoſtolike, their reſolutions be infallible as the others are. [Margin: The Proteſtāts fond diſtinctiō betvvene the 4 firſt & the later Councels. · Bezas blaſphemie againſt the firſt general Councels. · Beza in praef. Teſt. No. an. 1565. · Vvhat the Fathers attribute to Councels, & namely S. Auguſtine. · P⟨illegible⟩ouincial Councels.]

If any here aſke, vvhat neede ſo much diſputing, ſtudy, and trauail in Councels to find out and determine the truth, if the Holy Ghoſt infallibly guide them? Vve anſvver that ſuch is the ordinarie prouidence of God in this caſe, to aſſiſt them vvhen they doe their endeuour, and vſe all humane meanes of induſtrie, and not els. And ſo (though ſomvvhat othervviſe) God aſſiſted the Euangeliſtes and other vvriters of the holy Scriptures, that they could not erre in penning the ſame, but yet they did and ought to vſe al poſſible humane diligence to knovv and learne out the hiſtories and truth of matters, as is plaine in the beginning of S. Lukes Goſpel: els the Holy Ghoſt vvould not haue aſſiſted them. Euen ſo in this Councel of the Apoſtles, though they had the holy Ghoſt aſſiſtant, yet the text ſaith, cum magna conquiſitio fieret, Vvhen there vvas great diſputation, ſearch and examination of the caſe, then Peter ſpake &c. If againe it be demaunded, vvhat neede is there to expect the Councels determination, if the Popes or See Apoſtolikes iudgement be infallible and haue the aſſiſtance of God alſo, as the Catholikes affirme? Vve anſvver, that for the Catholike and peaceable obedient children of the Church it is a comfort to haue ſuch various meanes of determination, trial, and declaration of the truth, and that it is neceſſarie for the recouery of Heretikes, and for the contentation of the vveake, vvho not alvvaies giuing ouer to one mans determination, yet vvil either yeld to the iudgement of al the learned men and Biſhops of al Nations, or els remaine deſperate and condemned before God and man for euer. And as I ſaid before, this aſſiſtance of the Holy Ghoſt promiſed to Peters See, preſuppoſeth humane meanes of ſearching out the truth, vvhich the Pope alvvaies hath vſed, & vvil, & muſt vſe in matters of great importance, by calling Councels, euen as here you ſee SS. Peter and Paul them ſelues and al the Apoſtles, though indued vvith the Holy Ghoſt, yet thought it notvvithſtanding neceſſarie for further trial & cleering of truth and maintenance of vnitie, to keepe a Councel. [Margin: Notvvithſtanding the Holy Ghoſts aſſiſtance, yet humane meanes muſt be vſed to ſearch the truth. · Lu. 1, 3. · Though the See Apoſtolike it ſelf haue the ſame aſſiſtance, yet councels be alſo neceſſarie for many cauſes.]

Laſtly it is to be noted, that as Chriſt and the Holy Ghoſt be preſent by his promes, to al ſuch aſſemblies as gather in the obedience & vnitie of the Church, vvith ful minde to obey vvhatſoeuer ſhal be determined, vvhereby the aſſembled though of diuers iudgements before, do moſt peaceably yeld to truth, and agree in one vniforme determination of the ſame: ſo al ſuch as gather out of the Church, vvithout humilitie or intention to yeld one to an other, or to any Superior, man or Councel, or vvhat els ſo euer, but chalenge to them ſelues learning, ſpirit, and vve can not tel vvhat: ſuch, hovv many meetings ſo euer they make, being deſtitute of the Holy Ghoſt the author of truth and concord, are further of and further out, then euer before: as God hath ſhevved by the ſucceſſe of al Heretical Colloquies, Synodes, and Aſſemblies in Germanie, France, Poole, and other places in our daies. Read a notable place in S. Cyprian, that the promes of Chriſt, that he vvould be in the middes of tvvo or three gathered in his name, pertaineth not to them that aſſemble out of the Church. [Margin: Heretical or Schiſmatical aſſembles. · de vnit. Ec. nu. 7.]

3⟨illegible⟩. Reioyced vpon the conſolation.] Straight vpon the intelligence of the Councels determination, not only the Gentils, but euen the Maiſters of the former troubles and diſſenſion, vvere at reſt, & al tooke great comfort that the controuerſie vvas ſo ended And ſo ſhould al Chriſtian men do, vvhen they ſee the ſectes of our time condemned by the like authoritie and moſt graue iudgement of the holy Councel of Trent. Againſt vvhich the Heretikes of our time make the like friuolous exceptions and falſe cauillations, as did the old Heretikes heretofore againſt thoſe Councels that ſpecially condemned their errors. The Pope and Biſhopes (ſay they) are a partie, and they ought not to be our iudges: they are partial and come vvith preiudicate mindes to condemne vs, and vve accuſe them al of Idolatrie and other crimes, and vve vvil be tried by Gods vvord only, and vve vvil expound it according to an other rule, that is to ſay, as vve liſt. So ſay they againſt this Councel, and the like ſaid the Arians againſt the firſt Nicene Councel, and al ſuch like againſt thoſe Councels namely that condemned their hereſies. And ſo ſay al theeues againſt their correctors and puniſhers, and vvould both ſay and do more againſt temporal tribunals, Iudges, Iuſtices, and Iuries, if they had as much licence and libertie in thoſe matters, as men haue novv in religion. [Margin: Al good Chriſtians reſt vpon the determinatiō of a general Councel. · Al Heretikes make exceptiōs againſt the coūcels that condemne them.]

37. Diſſenſion] Such occaſions of differences fall out euen among the perfect men often, vvithout any great offence. And this their departing fell out to the great increaſe of Chriſtians. And therfore it is very ridiculouſly applied to excuſe the diſagreing of the Heretikes among them ſelues in the principal pointes of religion, namely the Sacrament.

Chapter 16

Paul hauing for his part viſited the Churches of Syria, Cilicia, and Lycaonia, deliuering vnto them vvithal to keepe the Decrees of the Councel: 6 beginneth a nevv iourney, ouer Phrygia, Galatia, Myſia: 8 Yea into Europe alſo he paſſeth, admoniſhed by a viſion, and commeth into Macedonia, 12 and there he beginneth the Church of the Philippians, vvorking miracles, and ſuffering perſecution.

1 AND he came to Derbé and Lyſtra. And behold, there vvas a certaine diſciple there named Timothee, the ſonne of a ⟨illegible⟩vvidovv' vvoman that beleeued, of a father a Gentile.

2 To this man the brethren that vvere in Lyſtra and Iconium, gaue a good teſtimonie.

3 Him Paul vvould haue to goe forth vvith him: and taking him he circumciſed him becauſe of the Ievves that vvere in thoſe places. For they al knevv that his father vvas a Gentile.

4 And vvhen they paſſed through the cities, they deliuered vnto them to keepe the decrees that vvere decreed of the Apoſtles and Auncients which were at Hieruſalem.

5 And the Churches vvere confirmed in faith, and did abound in number daily.

6 And paſſing through Phrygia and the countrie of Galatia, they vvere forbidden by the holy Ghoſt to preach the vvord in Aſia.

7 And vvhen they vvere come into Myſia, they attempted to goe into Bithynia: and the Spirit of IESVS permitted them not.

8 And vvhen they had paſſed through Myſia, they vvent dovvne to Troas:

9 and a viſion by night vvas ſhevved to Paul: There vvas a certaine man of Macedónia ſtanding and beſeeching him, and ſaying, paſſe into Macedónia, and helpe vs.

10 And as ſoone as he had ſeen the viſion, forthvvith vve ſought to goe into Macedónia, being aſſured that God had called vs to euāgelize to them.

11 And ſailing from Troas, vve came vvith a ſtraight courſe to Samothrácia, and the day folovving to Neapolis:

12 and from thence to Philippi, vvhich is the firſt citie of the part of Macedonia, a colónia. And vve were in this citie certaine daies, abiding.

13 And vpon the day of the Sabboths, vve vvent forth vvithout the gate beſide a riuer, vvhere it ſeemed that there vvas praier: & ſitting vve ſpake to the vvomen that vvere aſſembled.

14 And a certaine vvoman named Lydia, a ſeller of purple of the citie of the Thyatirians, one that vvorſhipped God, did heare: vvhoſe hart our Lord opened to attend to thoſe things vvhich vvere ſaid of Paul.

15 And vvhen ſhe vvas baptized, and her houſe, ſhe beſought vs, ſaying: If you haue iudged me to be faithful to our Lord, enter in vnto my houſe, and tarie. And ſhe conſtrained vs.

16 And it came to paſſe as vve vvent to praier, a certaine vvenche hauing a Pythónical ſpirit, mette vs, that brought great gaine to her maiſters by diuîning.

17 This ſame folovving Paul and vs, cried ſaying, Theſe men are the ſeruants of the high God, vvhich preach vnto you the vvay of ſaluation.

18 And this ſhe did many daies. And Paul being ſorie, and turning, ſaid to the ſpirit, I cōmaund thee in the name of IESVS CHRIST to goe out from her. And he vvent out the ſame houre.

19 But her maiſters ſeeing that the hope of their gaine vvas gone, apprehending Paul and Silas, brought them into the market place to the Princes:

20 and preſenting them to the magiſtrates, they ſaid, Theſe men trouble our citie, being Ievves:

21 and they preach a faſhion vvhich it is not lavvful for vs to receiue, nor doe, being Romanes.

22 And the people ranne againſt them: and the magiſtrates tearing their coates, commaunded them to be beaten vvith roddes.

23 And vvhen they had laid * many ſtripes vpon them, they did caſt them into priſon, commaunding the keeper that he ſhould keepe them diligently.

24 Vvho vvhen he had receiued ſuch commaundement, caſt them into the inner priſon, and made their feete faſt in the ſtockes.

25 And at mid-night, Paul and Silas praying, did praiſe God. And they that vvere in priſon, heard them.

26 But ſodenly there vvas made a great earthquake, ſo that the foundations of the priſon vvere ſhaken. And forthvvith al the doores vvere opened: and the bands of al vvere looſed.

27 And the keeper of the priſon vvaked out of his ſleepe, and ſeeing the doores of the priſon opened, dravving out his ſvvord, vvould haue killed him ſelf, ſuppoſing that the priſoners had been fled.

28 But Paul cried vvith a loud voice, ſaying, Doe thy ſelf no harme, for vve are al here.

29 And calling for light, he vvent in, and trembling fel dovvne to Paul and Silas at their feete:

30 and bringing them forth, he ſaid, Maiſters, vvhat muſt I doe that I may be ſaued?

31 But they ſaid, Beleeue in our Lord IESVS: and thou ſhalt be ſaued and thy houſe.

32 And they preached the vvord of our Lord to him vvith al that vvere in his houſe.

33 And he taking them in the ſame houre of the night, vvaſhed their vvounds: and him ſelf vvas baptized and al his houſe incontinent.

34 And vvhen he had brought them into his ovvne houſe, he laid the table for them, and reioyced vvith al his houſe, beleeuing God.

35 And vvhē day vvas come, the magiſtrates ſent the ſergeants, ſaying, Let thoſe men goe.

36 And the keeper of the priſon told theſe vvordes to Paul, That the magiſtrates haue ſent that you ſhould be let goe novv therfore departing, goe ye in peace.

37 But Paul ſaid to them: Being vvhipped openly, vncōdemned, men that are Romanes, they haue caſt vs into priſon: & novv do they ſend vs out ſecretly? Not ſo, but let them come, & let vs out them ſelues.

38 And the ſergeants reported theſe wordes to the magiſtrates. And they vvere afraid hearing that they vvere Romanes:

39 and comming they beſought them, & bringing them forth they deſired them to depart out of the citie.

40 And going out of the priſon, they entred in vnto Lydia: and hauing ſeen the brethren, they comforted them, and departed.

Marginal notes to Chapter 16

v. 1 Ievv
v. 4 ⸬ Here againe they take order that the decrees and articles of faith agreed vpon in the Councel of Ieruſalē ▪ ſhould be executed & obſerued, vvhereby vve ſee both the great authoritie of Councels, & the diligence that al Prelates ought to haue to ſee the decrees & Canons of the Coūcels put in executiō.
v. 6 ⸬ This people had not the Goſpel denied vnto them altogether, but for a time: becauſe (as Venerable Bede thinketh) God foreſavv they vvould not beleeue, & ſo ſhould haue been more greuouſly damned.
v. 12 ⸬ Colonia, is ſuch a citie where the moſt inhabitants are ſtrangers, ſent thither from other great cities & States, namely from the Romanes.
v. 17 ⸬ Either the Diuel vvas compelled by the vertue of Paules preſence to ſay truth, or els (as ſuch do often times) he ſpake truth novv, that they might the more truſt him, and he better beguile them at other times.
v. 23 2. Cor. 11.
v. 31 ⸬ It is no other faith that ſaueth but that vvhich vvorketh by Charitie. Aug. Enchirid. ⟨illegible⟩. 67.
v. 33 ᶜ Happie Gailers that doe mercie tovvard their godly priſoners, and receiue againe by them ſuch ſpiritual benefites.

Chapter 17

Hovv in other parts of Macedonia he planted the Church, and namely at Theſſalonica, 5 vvhere the obſtinate Ievves are ſo malicious, that they purſue him alſo into Ber⟨illegible⟩a▪ 14 From vvhence being conducted into Greece, he preacheth at Athens both to the Ievves and Gentiles, diſputing vvith the Philoſophers, 19 and in Areopagods, perſuading them from their Idols vnto one God and IESVS CHRIST raiſed from the dead.

1 AND vvhen they had vvalked through Amphipolis and Apollonia, they came to Theſſalonica, vvhere there vvas a ſynagogue of the Ievves.

2 And Paul according to his cuſtome entred in vnto them, & there Sabboths he diſcourſed to them out of the Scriptures,

3 declaring and inſinuating that it behoued CHRIST to ſuffer and to riſe againe from the dead: and that this is IESVS CHRIST, vvhom I preach to you.

4 And certaine of them beleeued, and vvere ioyned to Paul and Silas, and of the Gentiles that ſerued God a great multitude, and noble vvomen not a fevv.

5 But the Ievves enuying, & taking vnto them of the raſcal ſort certaine naughtie men, and making a tumult, ſtirred the citie: and beſetting Iaſons houſe, ſought to bring them forth vnto the people.

6 And not finding them, they drevv Iaſon and certaine brethren to the princes of the citie, crying, That theſe are they that ſtirre vp the vvorld, and are come hither,

7 vvhom Iaſon hath receiued, and al theſe doe againſt the decrees of Caeſar, ſaying that there is an other king, IESVS.

8 And they moued the people, and the princes of the citie hearing theſe things.

9 And taking a ſatisfaction of Iaſon and of the reſt, they dimiſſed them.

10 But the brethren forthvvith by night ſent avvay Paul and Silas vnto Beroea. Vvho vvhen they vvere come, entred into the ſynagogue of the Ievves.

11 (And theſe were more noble then they that are at Theſſalonica, vvho receiued the vvord vvith al greedines, daily ſearching the ſcriptures, if theſe things vvere ſo.

12 And many ſurely of them beleeued, and of honeſt vvomen Gentiles, and men not a fevv.)

13 And vvhen the Ievves in Theſſalonica vnderſtood, that at Beroea alſo the vvord of God vvas preached by Paul, they came thither alſo, mouing and troubling the multitude,

14 And then immediatly the brethren ſent avvay Paul, to goe vnto the ſea: but Silas and Timothee remained there.

15 And they that conducted Paul, brought him as farre as Athens, and receiuing commaundement of him to Silas and Timothee, that they ſhould come to him very ſpeedily, they departed.

16 And vvhen Paul expected them at Athens, his ſpirit vvas incenſed vvithin him, ſeeing the citie giuen to Idolatrie.

17 He diſputed therfore in the ſynagogue vvith the Ievves, & them that ſerued God, and in the market-place, euery day vvith them that vvere there.

18 And certaine Philoſophers of the Epicures and the Sto⟨illegible⟩kes diſputed vvith him, and certaine ſaid, Vvhat is it that this vvord-ſovver vvould ſay? But others, He ſeemeth to be a preacher of nevv gods. becauſe he preached to them IESVS and the reſurrection.

19 And apprehēding him, they led him to Areopagus, ſaying, May vve knovv vvhat this new doctrine is that thou ſpeakeſt of?

20 for thou bringeſt in certaine nevv things to our eares. Vve vvil knovv therfore vvhat theſe things may meane. (

21 And al the Athenians, and the ſtrangers ſeiourning there, emploied them ſelues to nothing els but either to ſpeake, or to heare ſome nevves▪)

22 But Paul ſtanding in the middes of Areopagus, ſaid: Ye men of Athens, in al things I perceiue you as it vvere ſuperſtitious.

23 For paſſing by and ſeeing your Idols, I found an altar alſo vvherevpon vvas vvritten, To the vnknovven God. That therfore vvhich you vvorſhippe, not knovving it, the ſame do I preach to you.

24 The God that made the vvorld and al things that are in it, he being Lord of heauen & earth, dvvelleth not in * temples made vvith hand,

25 neither is he ſerued vvith mens hands, needing any thing, vvhereas him ſelf giueth life vnto al, and breathing, and al things:

26 and he made of one al mākinde, to inhabite vpon the vvhole face of the earth, aſſigning ſet times, and the limits of their habitation,

27 for to ſeeke God, if happily they may feele or finde him, although he be not farre from euery one of vs.

28 For in him vve liue and moue and be, as certaine alſo of your ovvne poëtes ſaid, For of his kinde alſo vve are.

29 Being therfore of Gods kinde, vve may not ſuppoſe, the Diuinitie to be like vnto gold or ſiluer, or ſtone, the grauing of art and deuiſe of man.

30 And the times truely of this ignorance vvhereas God diſpiſed, novv he denounceth vnto men that al euery vvhere doe penance,

31 for that he hath appointed a day wherein he vvil iudge the world in equitie, by a man vvhom he hath appointed, giuing al men faith, rayſing him vp from the dead.

32 And vvhen they had heard the reſurrection of the dead, certaine in deede mocked, but certaine ſaid, Vve vvil heare thee againe concerning this point.

33 So Paul vvent forth out of the middes of them.

34 But certaine men ioyning vnto him, did beleeue: among vvhom vvas alſo Dionyſius Areopagîta, and a vvoman named Dámaris, and others vvith them. ⊢

Marginal notes to Chapter 17

v. 5 ⸬ Zelantes. This is the zeale of Heretikes, and a liuely paterne of their dealing at this day againſt Catholike Prieſts and preachers and the good Iaſons that receiue them.
v. 18 ᵇ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 18 ᶜ daemoniorum.
v. 21 The Epiſtle for S. Dionyſius Areopagita. Octob. 9.
v. 23 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 23 ᶜ The Aduerſaries (in the nevv Teſt. 1580) trāſlate, your deuotions, moſt corruptly againſt the nature of the Greeke vvord (2 Theſ. 2, 4) and moſt vvickedly, againſt the laudable deuotion of good Chriſtians, calling the Pagās idolatrie and ſuperſtitiō, their deuotions.
v. 24 ⸬ God is not concluded in Temples, nor needeth them for his neceſſitie of dvvelling, or other vſes of indigence. See Annot. c. 7. Act. v. 48.
v. 24 Act. 7, 48.
v. 28 Aratus.
v. 34 Dyonyſius Areopagita.

Annotations to Chapter 17

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XVII.

11. Searching the Scriptures.) The Heretikes vſe this place to proue that the heaters muſt trie and iudge by the Scriptures, vvhether their teachers and preachers doctrine be true, and ſo reiect that that they find not in the Scriptures, as though here the ſheepe vvere made iudges of their Paſtors, the people of the Prieſts, and men and vvomen of al ſortes, euen of S. Paules doctrine it ſelf: which vvere the moſt foliſh diſorder in the vvorld. And they did not therfore read the Scriptures of the old Teſtament (for none of the nevv vvere yet extant commonly) to diſpute vvith the Apoſtle, or to trie and iudge of his doctrine, or vvhether they ſhould beleeue him or no: for they vvere bound to beleeue him and obey his vvord, vvhether he alleaged Scripture or no, and vvhether they could reade or vnderſtand the Scriptures or no, but it vvas a great comfort and confirmation for the Ievves that had the Scriptures, to finde euen as S. Paul ſaid, that Chriſt vvas God, crucified, riſen, and aſcended to heauen: vvhich by his preaching and expounding they vnderſtood, and neuer before, though they read them, and heard them read euery Sabboth. As it is a great comfort to a Catholike man, to heare the Scriptures declared & alleaged moſt euidently for the Churches truth againſt Heretikes, in Sennons or othervviſe. And it doth the Catholikes good & much confirmeth them, to vew diligently the places alleaged by the Catholike preachers. Yet they muſt not be iudges for al that, ouer their ovvne Paſtors, vvhom Chriſt commaundeth them to heare and obey, and by vvhom they heare the true ſenſe of Scriptures. [Margin: The people may not iudge of the ſenſe of Scriptures. · The comfort of Chriſtian men by hearing or reading the Scriptures.]

22. Superſtitious.) S. Paul calleth not them ſuperſtitious for adoring the true and only God vvith much deuotion or many ceremonies or in comely preſcribed order, or for doing due reuerence to holy Sacraments, to Saincts and their memories, Images, or Monuments: or for keeping the preſcribed lavves, daies, and faſtes of the Church, or for fulfilling vowes made to God, or for bleſſing vvith the ſigne of the Croſſe, or for capping and kneeling at the name of IESVS, or for religiouſly vſing creatures ſanctified in the ſame name, or any other Chriſtian obſeruation, for vvhich our nevv Maiſters cōdemne the Catholike people of Superſtition: them ſelues vvholy voide of that vice by al vviſe mens iudgement, becauſe they haue in maner taken avvay al religion, and are become Epicureians and Atheiſts: vvho are neuer troubled vvith ſuperſtition, becauſe it is a vice conſiſting in exceſſe of vvorſhip or religion, vvhereof they are void, but the Apoſtle calleth them ſuperſtitious for vvorſhipping the Idols and goddes of the Heathen, and for the feare that they had, leſt they ſhould leaue out any God that vvas vnknovven to them: for thus their Altar vvas inſcribed: Dijs Aſia, Europa, & Lybia, Deo ignoto & peregrino. that is, To the gods of Aſia, Europe, and Lybia: to the vnknovven and ſtrange God. This ſuperſtition (ſaith S. Auguſtine) is vvholy taken avvay from the Church by Chriſts incarnation, and by the Apoſtles preaching, and by Martyrs holy life and death. Neither doth the Catholike Church allovv this or any other kinde of ſuperſtitious obſeruation. Only vve muſt take heede that vve beleeue not her Aduerſaries definition of ſuperſtition, for they vvould imply therein al true religion. [Margin: The Proteſtāts call deuotion, ſuperſtition. · The Apoſtle ſpeaketh of the Heathens ſuperſtition. · * ⟨non-Latin script⟩ · Aug. de cōſ. Euāg. li. 1 ⟨illegible⟩. 26. · The Catholike Church alloweth no ſuperſtition.]

29. This Diuinitie to be like.) Nothing can be made by mans hand of vvhat forme or ſort ſo euer, that is like to Gods eſſence, or to the forme or ſhape of his Godhead or Diuinitie. therfore hovvſoeuer the Heathens did paint or graue their Idols, they vvere nothing like to God▪ And this alſo is impertinently alleaged by Heretikes againſt the Churches images: Vvhich are not made, either to be adored vvith godly honour, or to be any reſemblance of the Diuinitie or any of the three perſons in Godhead, but only of Chriſt as he vvas in forme of man, vvho in that reſpect may be truely expreſſed, as other men by their purtraites: and of the Holy Ghoſt, not as he is in him ſelf, but as he appeared in firy tongues or in the ſimilitude of a doo⟨illegible⟩e, or ſuch like. And ſo to paint or graue any of the three perſons as they appeared viſibly and corporally, is no more inconuenient or vnlavvful, then it vvas vndecent for them to appeare in ſuch formes. And therfore to paint or portraite the Father alſo being the firſt perſon, as he hath ſhevved him ſelf in viſion to any of the Prophetes of the old or nevv Teſtament (namely to Daniel as an old man) or the three Angels repreſenting the three Perſons to Abraham, or the one Angel that vvraſtling vvith Iacob bare our Lords Perſon, no ſuch thing is any vvhere forbidden, but is very agreable to the peoples inſtruction. In vvhich ſort the Angels vvere commonly pourtered (and namely the Cherubins ouer the Propitiatorie) as they be novv in the Church, not in their natural forme, but vvith corporal vvinges (as the Seraphins appeared to Eſay the Prophete) to expreſſe their qualitie and office of being Gods Angels, that is, Meſſengers: and God the Father vvith the vvorld in his hand, to ſignifie his creation and gouernement of the ſame, and ſuch like: Vvhereof the people being vvel inſtructed may take much good, and no harme in the vvorld, being novv through their faith in Chriſt far from al fond imagination of the falſe gods of the Pagans. And therfore S. Gregorie ſaith of the Churches Images, That vvhich ſcripture or vvriting doth to the readers, the ſame doth the picture to the ſimple that looke therevpon. for in it euen the ignorant ſee vvhat they ought to folovv, in it they do read, that knovv no letters. Vvhere he calleth it a matter of antiquitie and very conuenient, that in holy places Images vvere painted to the peoples inſtruction, ſo they be taught that they may not be adored vvith diuine honour. and he in the ſame place ſharply rebuketh Serenus the Biſhop of Maſſilia, that of indiſcrete zele he vvould take avvay Images, rather then teach the people hovv to vſe them. [Margin: How there may be Images or reſemblāces of the thre perſons in Trinitie, and of Angels. · Dan. 7, 22. · Gen. 18, 2. · Gen. 32, 24 · Exo. 37, 7, · Eſa. 6, 2. · Images are for the peoples inſtruction. · Grego. li. 9 ep. 9.]

34. Dionyſius Areopagita.) This is that famous Denys that firſt conuerted France, and vvrote thoſe notable and diuine vvorkes de Eccleſiaſtica & ca⟨illegible⟩leſti hierarchia, de diuinis nominibus, and others, in vvhich he confirmeth and proueth plainely almoſt al things that the Church novv vſeth in the miniſtration of the holy Sacraments, and affirmeth that he learned them of the Apoſtles, giuing alſo teſtimonie for the Catholike faith in moſt things novv controuerſed, ſo plainely, that our Aduerſaries haue no ſhift but to deny this Denys to haue been the author of them, ⟨illegible⟩eyning that they be an others of later age. Vvhich is an old flight of Heretikes, but moſt proper to theſe of al others. Vvho ſeeing al antiquitie againſt them, are forced to be more bold or rather impudent then others in that point. [Margin: S. Dionyſius Areopagita is al for the Catholikes.]

Chapter 18

As Corinth in Achaia, he vvorketh vvith his ovvne hands, preaching IESVS to be CHRIST, vnto the Ievves vpon their Sabboths. 6 But they being obſtinate and blaſpheming, he in plaine termes forſaketh them, and turneth to the Gentils, among vvhom according to a viſion that he had to embolden him, he planteth the Church in great numbers, 12 the obſtinat Ievves in vaine ſoliciting the Proconſul againſt him. 18 From thence as length departing he returneth 19 by Epheſus (vvhere he promiſeth the Ievves to returne to them) 22 and ſo to Antioch in Syria (from vvhence he began his iourney Act. 15) 23 but not reſting, by and by he goeth againe to viſite the nevv Churches that he planted Act. 16 in Galatia and Phrygia: 24 Apollo in his abſence mightily confounding the Ievves at Epheſus, 27 and aftervvard at Corinth.

1 AFTER theſe things, departing from Athens, he came to Corinth.

2 and finding a certaine Ievv, named Aquila, borne in Pontus, vvho of late vvas come out of Italie, and Priſcilla his vvife (becauſe Claudius had commaunded al Ievves to depart from Rome,) he came to them.

3 And becauſe he vvas of the ſame craft, he remained vvith them, and vvrought, (and they vvere tentmakers by their craft.)

4 And he diſputed in the ſynagogue euery Sabboth, interpoſing the name of our Lord IESVS, and he exhorted the Ievves and the Greekes.

5 And vvhen Silas and Timothee vvere come from Macedonia, Paul vvas inſtant in preaching, teſtifying to the Ievves that IESVS is CHRIST.

6 But they contradicting and blaſpheming, he ſhaking his garmēts, ſaid to them, Your bloud vpon your ovvne head: I being cleane, from hence forth vvil goe to the Gentiles.

7 And departing thēce, he entred into the houſe of a certaine man, named Titus Iuſtus, one that ſerued God, vvhoſe houſe vvas adioyning to the ſynagogue.

8 And Criſpus the prince of the Synagogue beleeued our Lord, vvith al his houſe: and many of the Corinthians hearing beleeued, and vvere baptized.

9 And our Lord ſaid in the night by a viſion to Paul, Doe not feare, but ſpeake, and hold not thy peace,

10 for-becauſe I am vvith thee: and no man ſhal ſet vpon thee to hurt thee: for I haue much people in this citie.

11 And he ſate there a yere & ſixe moneths, teaching among them the vvord of God.

12 But Gallio being Proconſul of Achaia, the Ievves vvith one accord roſe vp againſt Paul, and brought him to the iudgement ſeate,

13 ſaying, That this man contrarie to the Lavv perſuadeth men to vvorſhippe God.

14 And Paul beginning to open his mouth, Gallio ſaid to the Ievves, If it vvere ſome vniuſt thing, or an heinous facte, O you men Ievves, I ſhould by reaſon beare you.

15 But if they be queſtions of vvord & names, and of your lavv, your ſelues looke vnto it: I vvil not be iudge of theſe things.

16 And he droue them from the iudgement ſeate.

17 And al apprehēding Sóſthenes the prince of the ſynagogue, ſtrooke him before the iudgement ſeate: and Gallio cared for none of thoſe things.

18 But Paul vvhen he had ſtaied yet many daies, taking his leaue of the brethren, ſailed to Syria, (and vvith him Priſcilla and Aquila,) vvho had ſhorne his head in Cenchris. for he had * a vovv.

19 And he came vnto Epheſus, and them he left there. But him ſelf entring into the ſynagogue, diſputed vvith the Ievves.

20 And vvhen they deſired him, that he vvould tarie a longer time, he conſented not,

21 but taking his leaue, and ſaying, I vvil returne to you againe God vvilling, he departed from Epheſus.

22 And going dovvne to Caeſaréa, he vvent vp, and ſaluted the Church, and came dovvne to Antioche.

23 And hauing taried there a certaine time, he departed, vvalking in order through the countrie of Galatia and Phrygia, confirming al the diſciples.

24 And a certaine Ievv, named Apollo, borne at Alexandria, an eloquent man, came to Epheſus, mighty in the ſcriptures.

25 This man vvas taught the vvay of our Lord: and being feruent in ſpirit he ſpake, and taught diligently thoſe things that pertaine to IESVS, knovving only the baptiſme of Iohn.

26 This man therfore began to deale confidently in the ſynagogue. Vvhom vvhen Priſcilla and Aquila had heard, they tooke him vnto them, and expounded to him the vvay of our Lord more diligently.

27 And vvhereas he vvas deſirous to goe to Achaia, the brethren exhorting vvrote to the diſciples to receiue him. Vvho, vvhen he vvas come, profited them much that had beleeued.

28 For he vvith vehemencie conuinced the Ievves openly, ſhevving by the ſcriptures, that IESVS is CHRIST.

Marginal notes to Chapter 18

v. 18 Nu. 6, 18. Act. 21, 24.
v. 24 Apollo.

Chapter 19

Hovv Paul began the Church of Epheſus, firſt in 1⟨illegible⟩ that vvere baptized vvith Iohns baptiſme, ⟨illegible⟩ then preaching three moneths in the Synagogue of the Ievves, vntil for their obſtinacie and blaſpheming, he forſooke them, diſputing aftervvard in a certaine ſchoole for tvvo yeres ſpace to the maruelous increaſe of the Church, ſpecially through his great miracles alſo, in healing diſeaſes vvith the touche of his clothes, and expelling di⟨illegible⟩els, 13 vvho yet contemned the Exorciſts of the Ievves. 18 Hovv the Chriſtians there confeſſe their actes, and burne their vnlavvful bookes: 21 and hovv he foretold that after he had been at Hieruſalem, he muſt ſee Rome. 23 and vvhat a great ſedition vvas raiſed againſt him at Epheſus, by them that got their liuing of vvorking to the idolatrous Temple of Diana.

1 AND it came to paſſe vvhen Apollo vvas at Corinth, that Paul hauing gone through the higher partes came to Epheſus, and found certaine diſciples:

2 and he ſaid to them, Haue you receiued the holy Ghoſt, beleeuing? But they ſaid to him, Nay, neither haue vve heard whether there be a holy Ghoſt.

3 But he ſaid, In vvhat then vvere you baptized? Vvho ſaid, In Iohns baptiſme.

4 And Paul ſaid: * Iohn baptized the people vvith the baptiſme of penance, ſaying: That they ſhould beleeue in him that vvas to come after him, that is to ſay, in IESVS.

5 Hearing theſe things, they vvere baptized in the name of our Lord IESVS.

6 And vvhen Paul had impoſed hands on them, the holy Ghoſt came vpon them, and they ſpake vvith tongues, and prophecied.

7 And all the men vvere about tvvelue.

8 And entring in to the ſynagogue, he ſpake confidently for three moneths, diſputing and exhorting of the kingdom of God. ⊢

9 But vvhen certaine vvere indûrate, and beleeued not, il-ſpeaking the vvay of our Lord before the multitude, departing from them, he ſeparated the diſciples, daily diſputing in the ſchole of one Tyrannus.

10 An this vvas done for the ſpace of tvvo yeres, ſo that al vvhich dvvelt in Aſia, heard the vvord of our Lord, Ievves and Gentils.

11 And God vvrought by the hand of Paul miracles not common:

12 ſo that there vvere alſo brought from his body ⟨illegible⟩ napkins or, handkerchefs vpon the ſicke, and the diſeaſes departed from them, and the vvicked ſpirits vvent out.

13 And certaine alſo of the Iudaical exorciſts that vvent about, aſſaied to inuocate vpon them that had euil ſpirits, the name of our Lord IESVS, ſaying, I adiure you by IESVS vvhom Paul preacheth.

14 And there vvere certaine ſonnes of Sceua a Ievve, cheefe prieſt, ſeuen, that did this.

15 But the vvicked ſpirit anſvvering, ſaid to them, IESVS I knovv, and ⟨illegible⟩ Paul I knovv: but you, vvhat are ye?

16 And the man in vvhom the vvicked ſpirit vvas, leaping vpon them, and maſtring both', preuailed againſt them, ſo that they fled out of that houſe naked and vvounded.

17 And this vvas made notorious to al the Ievves and the Gentiles that dvvelt at Epheſus: and feare fel vpon al them, and the name of our Lord IESVS vvas magnified.

18 And many of them that beleeued, came confeſſing and declaring their deedes.

19 And many of them that had folovved ⟨illegible⟩ curious things, brought together their ⟨illegible⟩ bookes, and burnt them before al: and counting the prices of them, they found the money to be fiftie thouſand pence.

20 So mightely increaſed the vvord of God and vvas confirmed.

21 And vvhen theſe things vvere ended, Paul purpoſed in the Spirit, vvhen he had paſſed through Macedonia and Achaia, to goe to Hieruſalem, ſaying, After I ſhall haue been there, I muſt ſee Rome alſo.

22 And ſending into Macedonia tvvo of them that miniſtred vnto him, Timothee and Eraſtus, himſelf remained for a time in Aſia.

23 And at that time there vvas made no litle trouble about the vvay of our Lord.

24 For one named Demetrius, a ſiluerſmith, that made ſiluer temples of Diána, procured to the artificers no ſmal gaine:

25 vvhom calling together and them that vvere the ſame kinde of vvorkemen, he ſaid, Sirs, you knovv that our gaine is of this occupation:

26 and you ſee, and heare that this ſame Paul by perſuaſion hath auerted a great multitude not only of Epheſus, but almoſt of al Aſia, ſaying, That they are not gods vvhich be made by handes.

27 And not only vnto vs is this part in danger to be reproued, but alſo the temple of great Diana ſhal be reputed for nothing, yea & her maieſtie ſhal begin to be deſtroied, vvhom al Aſia & the vvorld vvorſhippeth.

28 Hearing theſe things, they vvere repleniſhed vvith anger, and cried out ſaying, Great is Diana of the Epheſians.

29 And the vvhole citie vvas filled vvith confuſion, & they ranne violently vvith one accord in to the theátre, catching Gaius and Ariſtarchus Macedonians, Paules companions.

30 And vvhen Paul vvould haue entred into the people, the diſciples did not permit him.

31 And certaine alſo of the Princes of Aſia that vvere his frendes, ſent vnto him, deſying that he vvould not aduēture him ſelfe into the theátre:

32 and others cried an other thing. For the aſſemblie vvas confuſe, & the more part knevv not for vvhat cauſe they vvere aſſembled.

33 And of the multitude they drevv forth Alexander, the Ievves thruſting him forvvard. But Alexander vvith his hand deſiring ſilence, vvould haue giuen the people ſatisfaction.

34 Vvhom as ſoone as they perceiued to be a Ievve, there vvas made one voice of al, almoſt for the ſpace of tvvo houres crying out, Great is Diana of the Epheſians.

35 And vvhen the Scribe had appeaſed the multitudes, he ſaith, Ye men of Epheſus, for vvhat man is there that knovveth not the citie of the Epheſians to be a vvorſhipper of great Diana, & Iupiters childe?

36 Foraſmuch therfore as theſe things can not be gainſaid, you muſt be quieted, and doe nothing raſhly.

37 For you haue brought theſe men, being neither ſacrilegious, nor blaſpheming your Goddeſſe.

38 But if Demetrius and the artificers that are vvith him, haue matter to ſay againſt any man, there are Courtes kept in the common place, & there are Proconſuls, let them accuſe one an other.

39 And if you aſke any other matter: it may be reſolued in a lavvful aſſemblie.

40 For vve are in danger alſo to be accuſed for this daies ſedition: vvhereas there is no man guilty by vvhom vve may giue an account of this concourſe. And vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, he dimiſſed the aſſemblie.

Marginal notes to Chapter 19

v. 1 The Epiſtle vpō whitſon-eue.
v. 3 ᶜ Iohns baptiſme no⟨illegible⟩ ſufficiēt.
v. 4 Mt, 3, 11.
v. 4 Mr. 1, 8.
v. 4 Lu. 3, 16.
v. 4 ᶜ Chriſts baptiſme neceſſarie.
v. 6 ⸬ S. Paul miniſtred the Sacrament of Cōfirmatiō. See an̄ot, c. 8, ⟨illegible⟩.
v. 16 ` them
v. 18 ⸬ They made not only a general confeſſiō wherein al mē ſhew thē ſelues alike to be ſinners, as our Proteſtants do: but euery one confeſſed his owne proper deedes and faultes.
v. 19 The 6 part.
v. 21 ⸬ Of taking avvay the Goſpel frō Hieruſalem the head citie of the Iewes, and giuing it to ROME the head citie of the Gentils.
v. 24 ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 24 ᶜ The Proteſtants tranſlate, ſhrines, in the bible an. 1577: to make the people thinke that it toucheth the holy ſhrines of Sainctes: moſt corruptly, the greeke ſignifyng plainly, temples, and that of heathē gods:
v. 35 ⟨non-Latin script⟩.
v. 35 ᶜ Here the Heretikes adde to the text this word, image, more then is in the greeke, to put a ſcruple into the peoples minde concerning holy Images.

Annotations to Chapter 19

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XIX.

12. Napkins.] The napkins that had touched S. Paules body, vvrought miracles, and it vvas no ſuperſtition to attribute that vertue to them vvhich God gaue to them in deede: nor to ſeeke to touch them for health, vvas any diſhonour to God, but it much proued Chriſtes religiō to be true, and him to be the only God, vvhoſe ſeruants, yea vvhoſe ſeruants * ſhades and napkins could do ſuch vvonders, as S. Chryſoſtome (to. 5. cont. Gentiles, quòd Chriſtus ſit Deus, in vit. Babyla.) ſhovveth in a vvhole booke to that purpoſe, againſt the Pagans, prouing hereby and by the like vertue of other Saincts and their Relikes, that Chriſt their Lord and Maiſter is God▪ for it is al one concerning the bodies of Saincts, reliques, garments, ſtaues, bookes, or any thing that belonged to them, al which may and haue done and yet doe (vvhen it is neceſſarie to our edification) the like vvonders to Gods great honour: not only in their life time, but after their death much more▪ for S. Paules napkins had as great force vvhen he vvas dead, as vvhen he liued, and ſo much more, as his grace and dignitie vvith God is greater then before. Vvhich S. Chryſoſtom in the place alleaged proueth at large by the ſhrine of S. Babylas the Martyr: and to thinke the contrarie, is the Hereſie of Vigilantius, condemned ſo long ſince as S. Hieroms time, and by him refuted aboundantly. [Margin: Touching of Relikes, & miracles done by the ſame. · Act. 5, 15.]

16. Paul I knovv.] Both the ſaid napkins taken from S. Paules body, and his name alſo, vvere dreadful and able to expel diuels. Vvhereby vve learne that not only Chriſtes name, vvhich is the principal, but his ſeruāts names alſo inuocated vpon the poſſeſſed, haue povver ouer diuels: vvhich is a maruelous honour to Saincts, and nothing diminiſheth the glorie of Chriſt, but excedingly increaſeth the ſame, not only him ſelf, but his ſeruants alſo being able to do ſuch things, and to be ſtronger then any Diuel in Hel. So vve read in * S. Hierom that many did inuocate the name of S. Hilar⟨illegible⟩on vpon the poſſeſſed, and the Diuels ſtraight departed. ſo did the Diuel knovv * S. Babylas and other Saincts, euen after they vvere dead, vvhen they could not ſpeake for the preſence of their Relikes, and vvhen they vvere tormented and expelled by them: vvhereof al antiquitie is ful of teſtimonies. But our Heretikes Luther and Caluin and their Scholers attempting to caſt out Diuels, ſp⟨illegible⟩d much like as theſe good fellovves did. [Margin: The name, or preſence, or Reliques of Saincts & holy men, confound the Diuel. · In vit. Hilarionis. · Chryſ. loco citato.]

19. Curious things.] Curious and vnlavvful ſciences, as Vvitcheraft, Necromancie, and other meanes of diuination by ſouthſaying, figure-⟨illegible⟩aſting, interpretation of dreames, or any vvay not allovved by God and his Church, muſt much more be abhorred of old Chriſtians, vvhen theſe ſo lately conuerted vvere ſo zelous and diligent to leaue them And by this example al that are nevvly reconciled to the Church, are taught, the firſt thing they do, to burne their heretical and naughtie bookes. [Margin: Superſtitious, heretical, and al hurtful bookes muſt be made avvay.]

19. Bookes.] A Chriſtian man is bound to burne or deface al vvicked bookes of vvhat ſort ſo euer, ſpecially Heretical bookes. Vvhich though they infect not him alvvaies that keepeth them, yet being furth comming, they may be noiſom and pernicious to others that ſhal haue them and read them after his death, or othervviſe. Therfore hath the Church taken order for condemning al ſuch bookes, and againſt the reading of them, vvhere danger may enſue: and the Chriſtian Emperoures, Conſtantinus Magnus, Valentin⟨illegible⟩an, Theodoſius, Martian, Iuſtinian, made penal lavves for the burning or defacing of them. Sozem. li. 1 c. 20. li. 2c. ⟨illegible⟩. Conc. Chalac. act. 3. in fine, cap. Amplae. & in fine totius Conc. ⟨illegible⟩. Imperator. Conc. Conſtantinop. 2. conſeſ. 5. cap. Debitam. & Act. 1 cap. 1. & cap. Rem. See Euſebius li. ⟨illegible⟩ de vita Conſtant. c. 61. 62. 63. 64. The danger of reading them, as it is manifeſt, ſo it is ſignified by Euſeb. li. 7 c. 6. s. Auguſtine li. 3 de bapt. 6. 14. S. Greg. li. 5 ep. 64. [Margin: Decrees and penal lawes againſt heretical bookes.]

Chapter 20

Hauing viſited the Churches of Macedonia and Achaia (as he purpoſed Act. 19) and novv about to ſaile from Corinth tovvard Hieruſalem, becauſe of the Ievves lying in vvaite for him, he is conſtrained to returne into Maced⟨illegible⟩nia, & And ſo ⟨illegible⟩ Philippos taking boate, commeth to Troas, vvhere vpon the Sunday, vvith a ſermon, and a miracle, he greatly confirmeth that Church. 13 Thence comming to Milétum, 17 he ſendeth to Epheſus for the Clergie of thoſe partes: to vvhom he maketh a Paſtoral ſermon, committing vnto their charge the ſtocke begūne by him there, and novv like to be ſeen of him no more, conſidering the troubles that by reuelation he looketh for at Hieruſalem.

1 AND after that the tumult vvas ceaſed, Paul calling the diſciples, and exhorting them, tooke his leaue, and ſet forvvard to goe into Macedonia.

2 And vvhen he had vvalked through thoſe partes, & had exhorted them vvith much ſpeach, he came to Greece:

3 vvhere vvhen he had ſpent three moneths, the Ievves laid vvait for him as he vvas about to ſaile into Syria: and he had councel to returne through Macedonia.

4 And there accompanied him So⟨illegible⟩pater of Pyrrhus, of Beroea: and of Theſſalonians, Ariſtarchus, and Secundus: and Caius of Derbè, and Timothee: and of Aſia, Tychicus and Tróphimus.

5 Theſe going before, ſtaied for vs at Troas:

6 but vve ⟨illegible⟩ailed after the daies of Azymes from Philippi, and came to them vnto Troas in fiue daies, vvhere vve abode ſeuen daies.

7 And in the firſt of the Sabboth vvhen vve vvere aſſembled to breake bread, Paul diſputed vvith them, being to depart on the morovv, and he continued the ſermon vntil midnight.

8 And there vvere a great number of lampes in the vpper chamber vvhere vve vvere aſſembled.

9 And a certaine yong man named Eútychus, ſitting vpon the vvindovv, vvhereas he vvas oppreſſed vvith heauy ſleepe (Paul diſputing long) driuē by ſleepe, fel from the third loft downe, and vvas taken vp dead.

10 To vvhom vvhen Paul vvas gone dovvne, he lay vpon him: and embracing him he ſaid, Be not troubled, for his ſoule is in him.

11 And going vp and breaking bread and taſting, and hauing talked ſufficiently to them vntil day light, ſo he departed.

12 And they brought the lad aliue, and vvere not a litle comforted.

13 But vve going vp into the ſhip, ſailed to Aſſon, from thence meaning to receiue Paul. for ſo he had ordained, him ſelf purpoſing to iourney by land.

14 And vvhen he had found vs in Aſſon, taking him vvith vs vve came to Mi⟨illegible⟩yléne.

15 And ſailing thence, the day folovving vve came ouer againſt Chios: and the other day vve arriued at Samos: and the day folovving vve came to Milétum.

16 for Paul had purpoſed to ſaile leauing Epheſus, leſt any ſtay ſhould be made him in Aſia. For he haſtened, if it vvere poſſible for him, to keepe the day of ⟨illegible⟩ Pentecoſt at Hieruſalem.

17 And ſending from Milétum to Epheſus, he called the Auncients of the Church.

18 Vvho being come to him, and aſſembled together, he ſaid to them, You knovv * from the firſt day that I entred into Aſia, in vvhat maner I haue been vvith you al the time,

19 ſeruing our Lord vvith al humilitie and teares, and tentations that did chaunce to me by the conſpiracies of the Ievves:

20 Hovv I haue vvithdravven nothing that vvas profitable, but that I preached it to you, & taught you openly and from houſe to houſe,

21 teſtifying to Ievves and Gentils penance tovvard God and faith in our Lord IESVS CHRIST.

22 And novv behold, being bound by the ſpirit, I goe to Hieruſalem: not knovving vvhat things ſhal befall me in it,

23 but that the Holy Ghoſt through out al cities doth proteſt to me, ſaying: that bands and tribulations abide me at Hieruſalem.

24 But I feare none of theſe things, neither doe I make my life more pretious thē my ſelf, ſo that I may cōſūmat my courſe & miniſterie vvhich I receiued of our Lord IESVS, to teſtifie the Goſpel of the grace of God.

25 And novv behold I doe knovv, that you ſhal no more ſee my face al you, through vvhom I haue paſſed preaching the kingdom of God.

26 Vvherefore I take you to witneſſe this preſent day that I am cleere from the bloud of al.

27 For I haue not ſpared to declare vnto you al the counſel of God.

28 Take heede to your ſelues and to the vvhole flocke vvherein the Holy Ghoſt hath placed you biſhops, to rule the Church of God vvhich he hath purchaſed with his ovvne bloud.

29 I knovv that after my departure there vvil ⟨illegible⟩ rauening vvolues enter in among you, not ſparing the flocke.

30 and out of your ovvne ſelues ſhal ariſe men ſpeaking peruerſe things, to dravv avvay diſciples after them ſelues.

31 For the vvhich cauſe be vigilant, keeping in memorie that for three yeres night and day I ceaſed not vvith teares to admoniſh euery one of you.

32 And novv I commend you to God and to the vvord of his grace, vvho is able to edifie, and to giue inheritance in al the ſanctified.

33 No mans ſiluer and gold or garment haue I coueted.

34 Your ſelues knovv that for ſuch things as vvere needful for me and them that are vvith me, theſe hands haue miniſtred.

35 I haue ſhevved you al things, that ſo labouring, you muſt receiue the vveake, and remember the vvord of our Lord IESVS, becauſe he ſaid, ⟨illegible⟩ It is a more bleſſed thing to giue rather then to take.

36 And vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, falling on his knees he praied vvith al them.

37 And there vvas great vveeping made of al, and falling vpon the necke of Paul, they kiſſed him,

38 being ſorie moſt of al for the vvord vvhich he had ſaid, that they ſhould ſee his face no more. And they brought him going vnto the ſhippe.

Marginal notes to Chapter 20

v. 7 ⸬ S. Paul did here breake bread on the Sunday as it is broken in the Sacramēt of the body of Chriſt, and had both before & after the celebrating of the Sacramēt a ſermon to the people. Aug. ep. ⟨illegible⟩6 ad Caſulanū. V⟨illegible⟩ner. Beda in 20 Act.
v. 17 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩ That is, Prieſts as Act. 15. 4. See the marginal annot. there.
v. 18 Act. 19, 1
v. 21 ⸬ Apoſtolike preaching commendeth not faith only but penance alſo to the people.
v. 28 ⸬ Biſhops or Prieſts (for then theſe names were ſometime vſed indifferētly) gouernours of the Church of God, & placed in that roome & high functiō by the Holy Ghoſt.

Annotations to Chapter 20

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XX.

16. Pentecoſt.] Though the Apoſtles might deſire to come to the Ievves Feſtiuities, by reaſon of the general concourſe of people to the ſame, the better to deale for their ſaluation and ⟨illegible⟩o ſpred the Goſpel of Chriſt, yet it is like that they novv kept ſolemly the Chriſtian Pentecoſt or vvhitſontide, for memorie of the Holy Ghoſt, and that S. Paul vvent to that Feaſt of the Chriſtians rather then the other of the Ievves. And Ven. Bede ſaith here, The Apoſtle maketh haſt to keepe the fifteth day, that is, of remiſsion and of the Holy Ghoſt. For, that the Chriſtians already kept the eight day, that is, the Sunday or our Lordes day, and had altered already the ordinarie Sabboth into the ſame, it is plaine by the Scriptures (1 Cor. 16, 2. Apoc. 1, 10.) and by antiquitie. Iuſtin. Mart. Apolog. 2 ad Anton. Pium in fine. And it is as like that they changed the Ievves Paſche and Pentecoſt as that, ſpecially vvhen it is euident that * theſe Feſtiuities be kept by Apoſtolike tradition, and approued by the vſe of al auncient Churches and Councels. [Margin: The Chriſtian Pentecoſt▪ · Sunday. · Avg. ep. 118 c. 1.]

⟨illegible⟩9. Rauening vvolues.] The gouernours of the Church are foretold of the great danger that ſhould fall to the people by vvolues, that is to ſay, by Heretikes, vvhoſe cruelty tovvard the Catholikes is noted by this terme. They be knovvē by the forſaking the vnitie of the Church vvhereof they vvere before, by going out and dravving many diſciples after them, and by their peruerſe doctrine. Such vvolues came aftervvard in deede in diuers ages, Arius, M⟨illegible⟩cedonius, Neſtorius, Eutyches, Luther, Caluin, great bloudſucking vvolues, and vvaſters of the flocke of Chriſt. [Margin: Rauening vvolues are the Heretikes of al ages.]

35. More bleſſed to giue.] Among many other infinite goodly things and ſpeaches vvhich Chriſt ſpake and be not vvritten in the Goſpels, this ſentence is one: vvhich S. Paul heard of ſome of the Apoſtles daily conuerſant vvith him, or els learned of Chriſt him ſelf, or of the Holy Ghoſt▪ And it ſignifieth, that vvhereas the vvorld commonly counteth him happie that receiueth any benefite, as almes either temporal or ſpiritual, yet in deede he that giueth or beſtovveth, is more happie. Vvhich if the vvorld did vvel conſider, men vvould giue almes faſter then they do, if it vvere but for their ovvne benefite. [Margin: Chriſts ſpeaches not vvritten in the Goſpel. · Great almeſmen bleſſed.]

Chapter 21

From Milētum going on his iourney, 4 he can not be diſſuaded neither as Tyre, 8 nor at Caeſarea (in both vvhich places the Holy Ghoſt reueled hovv he ſhould be handled in Hieruſalem, 10 the Prophet Agabu⟨illegible⟩ expreſly foretelling that the Ievves there ſhould deliuer him to the Gentils) 15 but to Hieruſalem he cōmeth: vvhere being vvelcome to the Chriſtians, and namely to Iames the Biſhop, and to the Prieſts, vvhile he goeth about to ſatisfie the Chriſtian Ievves there, vvho had been miſinformed of him as if he had taught it to be vnlawful for the Iewes to keepe Moyſes Lavv: 27 he is inuaded by the infidel Ievves, and ready to be murdered by them, vntil the Romane ſouldiars do reſcue him.

1 AND vvhen it came to paſſe that vve ſailed, being caried from them, vvith a ſtraight courſe vve came to Cóos, and the day folovving to Rhodes, and from thence to Pátara.

2 And when vve had found a ſhip that paſſed ouer to Phoenîce, going vp into it vve ſailed.

3 And vvhen vve vver⟨illegible⟩ in the ſight of Cypres, leauing it on the left hand, vve ſailed into Syria, and came to Tyre: for there the ſhip vvas to diſcharge her lode.

4 And finding diſciples, vve taried there ſeuen daies: vvho ſaid to Paul by the Spirit, that he ſhould not goe vp to Hieruſalem.

5 And the daies being expired, departing vve vvent forvvard, al bringing vs on the vvay, vvith their vviues and children, til vve vvere out of the citie: and falling vpon our knees on the ſhore, vve praied.

6 And vvhen vve had bid one an other farevvel, vve vvent vp into the ſhip: and they returned vnto their ovvne.

7 But vve hauing ended the nauigation, from Tyre came dovvne to Prolomáis: and ſaluting the brethren, vve taried one day vvith them.

8 And the next day departing, vve came to Caeſarêa. And entring into the houſe of * Philip the Euangeliſt, vvho vvas one of the ſeuen, vve taried vvith him.

9 And he had foure daughters virgins, that did prophecie.

10 And as vve abode there for certaine daies, there came a certaine prophet from Ievvrie, named Agabus.

11 He, vvhē he vvas come to vs, tooke Paules girdle: and binding his ovvne handes & feete, he ſaid, Thus ſaith the holy Ghoſt: The man vvhoſe girdle this is, ſo ſhal the Ievves binde in Hieruſalem, & ſhal deliuer him into the handes of the Gentiles.

12 Vvhich when vve had heard, vve & they that vvere of the ſame place, deſired him that he would not goe vp to Hieruſalem.

13 Then Paul anſvvered, and ſaid, Vvhat doe you, vveeping and afflicting my hart? for I am ready not only to be bound, but to die alſo in Hieruſalem for the name of our Lord IESVS.

14 And vvhen vve could not perſuade him, we ceaſed, ſaying, The vvil of our Lord be done.

15 And after theſe daies, being prepared, vve vvent vp to Hieruſalem.

16 And there came alſo of the diſciples from Caeſarêa vvith vs, bringing vvith them one Iaſon a Cyprian (vvith vvhom vve ſhould lodge) an old diſciple.

17 And vvhen vve vvere come to Hieruſalem, the brethren receiued vs gladly.

18 And the day folovving Paul vvent in vvith vs to Iames, and al the Auncients vvere aſſembled.

19 Vvhom vvhen he had ſaluted, he told particularly vvhat God had done among the Gentiles by his miniſterie.

20 But they hearing it, magnified God, and ſaid to him: Thou ſeeſt (brother) hovv many thouſands there are among the Ievves that haue beleeued: and al are zelátours of the Lavv.

21 But they haue heard of thee that thou doeſt teach thoſe Ievves that are among the Gentiles, to depart from Moyſes: ſaying that they ought not to circumciſe their children, nor vvalke according to the cuſtome.

22 Vvhat is it then? needes muſt the multitude aſſemble: for they vvil heare that thou art come.

23 Doe this therfore vvhich vve tel thee, There are vvith vs foure men, that haue a vovve on them.

24 Taking theſe vnto thee, ſanctifie thy ſelf vvith them: and beſtovv on them, that they may * ſhaue their heads: and al ſhal knovv that the things vvhich they heard of thee, are falſe: but that thy ſelf alſo vvalkeſt ⟨illegible⟩ keeping the Lavv.

25 But concerning them that beleeue of the Gentils, * vve haue written, decre⟨illegible⟩ing that they ſhould refraine them ſelues from the immolated to Idols, and bloud, and ſuffocated, and fornication.

26 Then Paul taking the men vnto him, the next day being purified vvith them entred into the temple, ſhevving the accompliſhment of the * daies of the purification, vntil an oblation vvas offered for euery one of them.

27 But vvhiles the ſeuen daies vvere a finiſhing, thoſe Ievves that vvere of Aſia, vvhen they had ſeen him in the temple, ſtirred vp al the people, and laid handes vpon him,

28 crying, Ye men of Iſraël, this is the man that againſt the people & the Lavv and this place teaching al men euery vvhere, hath alſo moreouer brought in Gentiles into the temple, and hath violated this holy place. (

29 For they had ſeen Trōphimus the Epheſian in the citie vvith him, vvhom they ſuppoſed that Paul had brought into the temple.)

30 And the vvhole citie vvas in an vproare: and there vvas made a concourſe of the people. And apprehending Paul, they drevve him forth of the temple: and immediatly the doores vvere ſhut.

31 And as they ſought to kil him, it vvas told the Tribune of the band, That al Hieruſalem is in a confuſion.

32 Vvho forthvvith taking vnto him ſouldiars & Centurions, ranne dovvne to them. Who, vvhē they had ſeen the Tribune and the ſouldiars, ceaſed to ſtrike Paul.

33 Then the Tribune comming neere apprehended him, and commaunded him to be bound vvith tvvo chaines: and he demaunded vvho he vvas, and vvhat he had done.

34 And ſome cried one thing, ſome an other, in the multitude. And vvhereas he could not knovv the certaintie for the tumult, he commaunded him to be led into the caſtel.

35 And vvhen he vvas come to the ſtaires, it chaunced that he vvas caried of the ſouldiars becauſe of the violence of the people.

36 For the multitude of the people folovved, crying, Avvay vvith him.

37 And vvhen Paul began to be brought into the caſtel, he ſaith to the Tribune, Is it lavvful for me to ſpeake ſomething to thee? Vvho ſaid, Canſt thou ſpeake Greeke?

38 Art not thou the Aegyptian that before theſe daies did raiſe a tumult, and didſt lead forth into the deſert foure thouſand men that vvere murderers?

39 And Paul ſaid to him, * I am a man truely a Ievv⟨illegible⟩ of Tarſus, a citizen not of an obſcure citie of Cilicia. And I deſire thee, permit me to ſpeake to the people.

40 And vvhen he had permitted him, Paul ſtāding on the ſtaiers, beckened with his hand to the people. and great ſilence being made, he ſpake vnto them in the Hebrevv tongue, ſaying.

Marginal notes to Chapter 21

v. 8 Act. 6, 5
v. 9 ⸬ As S. Peter had a wife, but vſed her not after his calling, as it is noted els where out of S. Hierom Lu⟨illegible⟩. 4, 38: ſo may it ⟨illegible⟩e ⟨illegible⟩a⟨illegible⟩d of S. Philip being De⟨illegible⟩con.
v. 24 Nu. 6, 18.
v. 25 Act. 15, 20.
v. 26 Nu. 6, 13
v. 34 ᶜ In caſtra. So in the places folovving.
v. 39 Act. 22, 3.

Annotations to Chapter 21

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XXI.

9. Virgins.] S. Luke noteth ſpecially that his daughters vvere Virgins, meaning (no doubt) that they vvere of the ſtate, profeſſion, or purpoſe of perpetual virginitie, not only that they vvere yong maides vnmaried: and that they vvere the rather for that, endued vvith the gift of prophecie, as S. Hierom ſaith li. 1 adu. Iouin. c. 24. See Oecum. c. 29 in hunc locum. [Margin: Virgins.]

⟨illegible⟩4. Keeping the Lavv.] Al the obſeruations of the Lavv vvere novv in them ſelues dead and vnprofitable, yet til further propagation of the Goſpel, they vvere not damnable to the keepers, nor offenſiu⟨illegible⟩ to God, but might be obſerued euen of the Chriſtian Ievves. and for feare of ſcandalizing the vveake of that nation, nevvly conuerted or prone to receiue the faith, the Apoſtles by Gods ſuggeſtion did thinke it good to obſerue them as occaſion required. [Margin: Auoiding of ſcādal in things not vnlavvful.]

Chapter 22

Being licenſed by the Tribune to ſpeake to the people, he ſhevveth them that he vvas once as earneſt on that ſide as they novv be: 6 and hovv ſtrange and miraculous his conuerſion vvas. 17 They heare him quietly, vntil he began to make mention of a viſion that ſent him avvay from them to the Gentils. 22 Then they crie out vpon him ſo, 23 that for their crying the Tribune commaundeth him to be ſcourged▪ as Which yet by his vviſedom he eſcapeth.

1 MEN brethren and fathers, heare vvhat account I doe render novv vnto you.

2 (And vvhen they had heard that he ſpake to them in the Hebrevv tongue, they did the more keepe ſilēce.

3 And he ſaith,) * I am a man a Ievve, borne at Tarſus in Cilicia, but brought vp in this citie, at the feete of Gamaliel inſtructed according to the veritie of the lavv of the fathers, an emulátour of the Lavv as alſo al you are this day:

4 vvho * perſecuted this vvay vnto death, binding & deliuering into cuſtodies men & vvomē,

5 as the high Prieſt doth giue me teſtimonie, and al the auncients.

6 of vvhom * receiuing letters alſo to the brethren, I vvent to Damaſcus, that I might bring them thence bound to Hieruſalem, to be puniſhed.

7 And it came to paſſe as I vvas going, and dravving nigh to Damaſcus at midday, ſodēly from heauen there ſhone round about me much light:

8 and falling on the ground, I heard a voice ſaying to me, Saul, Saul, vvhy perſecuteſt thou me?

9 And I anſvvered, Vvho art thou Lord? And he ſaid to me, I am IESVS of Nazareth, vvhom thou perſecuteſt.

10 And they that vvere vvith me, ſavv the light in deede, but the voice they heard not of him that ſpake vvith me.

11 And I ſaid, Vvhat ſhal I doe Lord? And our Lord ſaid to me, Ariſe and goe to Damaſcus: and there it ſhal be told thee of al things that thou muſt doe.

12 And vvhereas I did not ſee for the brightneſſe of that light, being led of my companions by the hand, I came to Damaſcus.

13 And one Ananias, a man according to the Lavv hauing teſtimonie of al the Ievves inhabitants,

14 comming to me, and ſtanding by me, ſaid to me, Brother Saul, looke vp. And I the ſelf ſame houre looked vp on him.

15 But he ſaid, The God of our fathers hath prëordained thee, that thou ſhouldeſt knovv his vvil, and ſee the Iuſt one, and heare a voice from his mouth:

16 becauſe thou ſhalt be his vvitnes to al men, of thoſe things vvhich thou haſt ſeen and heard.

17 And novv vvhat tarieſt thou? Riſe vp, and be baptized, & vvaſh avvay thy ſinnes inuocating his name.

18 And it befel me returning into Hieruſalem, and praying in the temple, that I vvas in a traunce,

19 and ſavv him ſaying vnto me, Make haſt, and depart quickely out of Hieruſalem: becauſe they vvil not receiue thy teſtimonie of me.

20 And I ſaid, Lord, they knovv that I did caſt into priſon and beate in euery ſynagogue them that beleeued in thee.

21 And vvhen the bloud of Steuen thy vvitnes vvas ſhed, I ſtoode by and conſented, and kept the garments of them that killed him.

22 And he ſaid to me, Goe, for into the Gentiles a farre vvil I ſend thee.

23 And they heard him vntil this vvord, and they lifted vp their voice, ſaying, Avvay vvith ſuch an one from the earth: for it is not meete he ſhould liue.

24 And vvhen they cried out, and threvv of their garments, and caſt duſt into the aire,

24 the Tribune commaunded him to be caried into the caſtel, and to be beaten vvith vvhippes, and that he ſhould be tormented: to knovv for vvhat cauſe they did ſo crie at him.

25 And vvhen they had bound him very ſtraight vvith thōgs, Paul ſaith to the Centurion ſtanding by him: Is it lavvful for you to vvhippe a man that is a Romane and vncondemned?

26 Vvhich the Centurion hearing, vvent to the Tribune, and told him, ſaying, Vvhat vvilt thou doe? for this man is a citizen of Rome.

27 And the Tribune comming, ſaid to him, Tel me, art thou a Romane? But he ſaid, Yea.

28 And the Tribune anſvvered, I obtained this citie vvith a great ſumme. And Paul ſaid, But I vvas alſo borne to it.

29 Immediatly therfore they departed from him that vvere to torment him. The Tribune alſo feared after he vnderſtoode that he was a citizē of Rome, and becauſe he had bound him.

30 But the next day meaning to knovv more diligently for vvhat cauſe he vvas accuſed of the Ievves, he looſed him, and commaunded the Prieſts to come together and al the Councel: & bringing forth Paul, he ſet him among them.

Marginal notes to Chapter 22

v. 3 Act. 21, 39.
v. 4 Act. 8, 3
v. 5 Act. 9, 2
v. 17 ⸬ The Sacramc of Baptiſme doth it ſelf vvaſh avvay ſinnes as here is plaine, & therfore doth not only ſignifie (as the Heretikes affirme) that out ſinnes be forgiuen before, or othervviſe by faith only remitted Vvhereby the Churches doctrine is proued to be fully agreable to the Scriptures, that the Sacraments giue grace ex opere operato▪ that is, by the force & vertue of the vvorke and vvord, done & ſaid in the Sacrament.
v. 21 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 21 ⸬ Not only the Principals but al that conſent to the death or vexation of Chriſtian men for the Catholike ſaith, do highly offend. vvhich the Apoſtle confeſſeth here, that Gods mercie may be more notoriouſly glorified in him hereby.
v. 21 Act. 7, 38.
v. 30 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩

Chapter 23

As the people in the tumult, ſo alſo the very ch⟨illegible⟩efe of the Ievves in their Councel ſhevv them ſelues obſtina⟨illegible⟩, and vvilful perſecutors of the truth in S. Pauls perſon. Whoſe behauiour tovvardes them is ful of conſtancie, modeſtie, and vviſedom, 11 (Chriſt alſo by a viſion encouraging him, and foretelling that he ſhal to Rome.) 12 Yea they conſpire vvith 40 men to kil him traiterouſly. 1⟨illegible⟩ But the matter being detected, the Romane Tribune conueigheth him ſtrongly to Caeſaréa.

1 AND Paul looking vpon the Councel, ſaid, Men brethren, I vvith al good conſcience haue conuerſed before God, vntil this preſent day.

2 And the high Prieſt Ananias commaunded them that ſtoode by him, to ſmite him on the mouth.

3 Then Paul ſaid to him, God ſhal ſtrike thee, thou vvhited vvall. And thou ſitting iudgeſt me according to the lavv, and contrarie to lavv doeſt thou commaund me to be ſmitten?

4 And they that ſtoode by, ſaid, Doeſt thou reuile the high Prieſt of God?

5 And Paul ſaid, ⟨illegible⟩ I knevve not, brethren, that he is the high Prieſt. For it is vvritten: The prince of thy people thou ſhalt not miſſpeake.

6 And Paul knovving that the one part vvas of Sadducees, and the other of Phariſees, he cried out in the Councel, Men brethren, * I am a Phariſee, the ſonne of Phariſees: of the hope and reſurrection of the dead am I iudged.

7 And vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, there roſe diſſenſion betvvene the Phariſees and Sadducees, and the multitude vvas diuided.

8 For the ⟨illegible⟩ Sadducees ſay * there is no reſurrection, nor Angel, nor ſpirit: but the Phariſees confeſſe both.

9 And there vvas made a great crie. And certaine of the Phariſees riſing vp, ſtroue ſaying, Vve finde no euil in this man. vvhat if a ſpirit hath ſpoken to him, or an Angel?

10 And vvhen there vvas riſen great diſſenſiō, the Tribune fearing leſt Paul ſhould be torne in peeces by them, cōmaunded the ſouldiars to goe dovvne, and to take him out of the middes of them, and to bring him into the caſtel.

11 And the night folovving our Lord ſtanding by him, ſaid, Be conſtant: for as thou haſt teſtified of me in Hieruſalem, ſo muſt thou teſtifie at Rome alſo.

12 And vvhen day vvas come, certaine of the Ievves gathered them ſelues together, & ⟨illegible⟩ vovved them ſelues, ſaying, that they vvould neither eate nor drinke til they killed Paul.

13 And they vvere more then fourtie men that had made this conſpiracie:

14 vvho came to the cheefe prieſts and the auncients, and ſaid, By execration vve haue vovved our ſelues, that vve vvil eate nothing, til vve kill Paul.

15 Novv therfore giue you knovvledge to the Tribune vvith the Coūcel, that he bring him forth to you, as if you meant to knovv ſome more certaintie touching him. But we, before he come neere, are ready for to kil him.

16 Vvhich vvhen Paules ſiſters ſonne had heard, of their lying in vvaite, he came and entred into the caſtel and told Paul.

17 And Paul calling to him one of the Centurions, ſaid, Bring this yong man to the Tribune, for he hath ſome thing to tel him.

18 And he taking him, brought him to the Tribune, and ſaid, The priſoner Paul deſired me to bring this yong man vnto thee, hauing ſome thing to ſay to thee.

19 And the Tribune taking him by the hand, vvent aſide vvith him apart, and aſked him, Vvhat is it that thou haſt to tel me?

20 And he ſaid, The Ievves haue agreed to deſire thee, that to morovv thou vvilt bring forth Paul into the Councel, as though they meant to inquire ſome more certaintie touching him.

21 But doe not thou credite them, for there lie in vvaite for him more then fourtie men of them, vvhich haue vovved neither to eate nor to drinke, til they kil him: and they are novv ready, expecting thy promiſſe.

22 The Tribune therfore dimiſſed the yong man, commaunding that he ſhould ſpeake to no man that he had notified theſe things vnto him.

23 And calling tvvo Centurions, he ſaid to them, Make ready tvvo hundred ſouldiars, to goe as farre as Caeſaréa, and ſeuentie horſemen, and launces tvvo hundred, from the third houre of the night:

24 and prepare beaſts▪ that ſetting Paul on, they might bring him ſafe to Felix the Preſident (

25 For he feared leſt perhaps the Ievves might take him avvay, and kil him, and him ſelf aftervvard ſhould ſuſtaine reproche, as though he vvould haue taken money)

26 vvriting a letter conteining this much. Claudius Lyſias to the moſt excellent Preſident Felix, greeting.

27 This man being apprehended of the Ievves, and ready to be killed of them, I comming in vvith the band deliuered him, vnderſtanding that he is a Romane:

28 and meaning to knovv the cauſe that they obiected vnto him, I brought him downe into their Councel.

29 Vvhom I found to be accuſed concerning queſtions of their lavv: but hauing no crime vvorthie of death or of bandes.

30 And vvhen it vvas told me of embuſhments that they had prepared againſt him, I ſent him to thee, ſignifying alſo to the accuſers, to ſpeake before thee. Fare vvel.

31 And the ſouldiars according as it vvas commaunded them, taking Paul, brought him by night to Antipatris.

32 And the next day ſending avvay the horſemen to goe vvith him, they returned to the caſtel.

33 Vvho vvhen they vvere come to Caeſaréa, and had deliuered the letter to the Preſident, they did ſet Paul alſo before him.

34 And vvhen he had read, and had aſked of vvhat prouince he vvas: and vnderſtanding that of Cilicia:

35 I vvil heare the, ſaid he, vvhen thy accuſers are come. And he commaunded him to be kept in Herods palace.

Marginal notes to Chapter 23

v. 3 ⸬ He ſaid not this through perturbation of minde or of a paſſion, but by way of prophecie, that this figuratiue high prieſthod then trimmed l⟨illegible⟩ke a vvhited vvall, was to be deſtroied, vvhereas now the true prieſthod of Chriſt was cōt. Beda. in hun⟨illegible⟩ Io.
v. 5 Exo. 22, 28.
v. 6 ⸬ Such prudent euaſions from danger are lawful. vvhich S. Chryſoſtōe calleth (ſpecially in this Apoſtle) the wiſdom of the ſerpēt, as otherwiſe in his teaching and preaching & patiēco he vſed the ſimplicitie of dooue,
v. 6 Phil. 3, 5.
v. 7 Mt. 22, 23.
v. 11 ⸬ Though God who could not lie, had promiſed Paul that he ſhould goe to Rome: yet the Apoſtle omitted not humane meanes to defend him ſelf from his enemies and otherwiſe. neither ſaid he as the Heretikes called Predeſtinates, Let them do what they wil▪ they cā not hurt me, for I am pr⟨illegible⟩deſtinate to go⟨illegible⟩ to Rome, See his doings and ſayings to ſaue him ſelf, in the chap. folowing.
v. 18 ᶜ See the courteſie & equiti⟨illegible⟩ of Heathen Officers tovvard their priſoners, to ſaue them from al iniurie and villanie.

Annotations to Chapter 23

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XXIII.

⟨illegible⟩. I knevv not.] Our Lord (ſaith S. Cyprian) in the Goſpel, when it was ſaid to him, Anſwereſt thou the high Prieſt ⟨illegible⟩ teaching that the honour of Prieſthod muſt be kept, ſaid nothīg to the high Prieſt, but only purging his innocencie, ſaid, If I haue ſpoken euil, beare witnes of euil: but if wel, why ſmiteſt thou me? Alſo the bleſſed Apoſtle vvhen it vvas ſaid to him▪ Doeſt thou aſſaile the high Prieſt ſo with il wordes? ſpake not any thing cōtumeliouſly againſt the Prieſt, whereas he might haue put forth him ſelf ſtoutly againſt them which had both crucified our ⟨illegible⟩ and vvhich had novv alſo loſt their God and Chriſt, Temple and Prieſthod▪ but though in falſe and ſpoiled Prieſts, yet cōſidering the very bare ſhadovv of the name of Prieſts, he ſaid, I knew not brethren that he vvas high Prieſt. By vvhich vvordes of the Apoſtle, either it ma⟨illegible⟩ be thought he knevv not in deed that he vvas in that function, becauſe he had not beene of long time in thoſe partes: or els that he ſo ſaid in reſpect of the abrogation of the high Prieſthod of the Ievves, vvhereby he knevv this man not to be truely any Prieſt▪ as alſo becauſe at this time they came not orderly to it by ſucceſſion of Aaron and Lavv of Moyſes, but by the Roman Emperours f⟨illegible⟩uour, * as is ſaid before▪ though (as it is lavvful in ſuch a caſe) the Ieſſe to irritate them, he frameth his ſpeach ſo ⟨illegible⟩ they might not take occaſion of further accuſation againſt him. [Margin: The honour of Prieſthod. · Cypr. ep. 65. 69. ⟨illegible⟩. 2. · See Annot. Io. c. 11, 51.]

8. The Sadducees.] This vvas the vvorſt Hereſie among the Ievves, denying that there be any Angels, or ſpirits, the Reſurrectiō alſo of the bodies: & conſequētly (as it may very vvel be gathered by the booke of the Machabees) they denied praier for the dead. for to offer or pray for the dead, & to thinke rightly & religiouſly of the Reſurrectiō, are made there ſequels one of an other. Of this ſect of Sadducees vvas (as Euſebius vvriteth li. 2. c. 2⟨illegible⟩. Ec. hiſt.) this Ananias the High Prieſt▪ that cauſed Paul to be ſmitten, for their Prieſthod had novv no more the protection of God to preſerue it in truth and right iudgement, the Chriſtian Prieſthod being then eſtabliſhed. [Margin: The Sadducees (as it ſeemeth) denied praier for the dead. · Mac. li. 2. c. 12, 43.]

12. Vovved them ſelues▪] Such vovve, other, or execrations as this, binde no man before God, yea they muſt in no vviſe be obſerued. It is a great offence either to vovv voluntarily, or to take any ſuch thing vpon a man, for feare or by commaundement. For example, if thou haue raſhly by promes, vow, or othe, appointed to be reuenged vpon any man, thou bindeſt not thy ſelf thereby, neither muſt thou keepe thy promes. If thou be put to an othe to accuſe Catholikes for ſeruing God as they ought to do, or to vtter any innocent man to Gods enemies and his, thou oughteſt firſt to refuſe ſuch vnlavvful othes: but if thou haue not conſtancie and courage ſo to do, yet know thou that ſuch othes binde not at al in conſcience and Lavv of God, but may and muſt be broken vnder paine of damnation. For to make or take ſuch vowes or othes, is one ſinne, a⟨illegible⟩d to keepe them, is an other far greater▪ as vvhen Herode, to keepe his othe, killed Iohn Baptiſt. And ſuch vowes and othes to God as theſe, are vnlavvful & muſt be broken: and not the vowes of Chaſtitie and Religion, as our nevv Miniſters teach by their vvordes and vvorkes. [Margin: Vnlawful othe⟨illegible⟩ & vovves muſt no⟨illegible⟩ to kept. · Mat. 14. 9.]

Chapter 24

They proſecute him to Caeſarea, bringing vvith them an oratour, vvho before the Preſident Felix a⟨illegible⟩cuſeth him, 10 He anſvvereth, defending him ſelf from the crimes they charged him vvith, but confeſsing his religion plainly. ⟨illegible⟩ The Iudge perceiuing his religion to be irreprehenſible▪ yeldeth not to condemne him at their pleaſure, 24 yea he oftentimes vvith his vvife heareth his preaching, 37 but yet doth not his dutie to deliuer him out of priſon.

1 AND after fiue daies the high prieſt Ananias deſcended, vvith certaine auncients and one Tertullus an oratour, vvho vvent to the Preſident againſt Paul.

2 And Paul being cited, Tertullus began to accuſe, ſaying. Vvhereas vve liue in much peace by thee, & many things are corrected by thy prouidence▪

3 vve doe alvvaies and in al places receiue it, moſt excellent Felix, vvith al thanks geuing.

4 But leſt I hinder then any longer, I deſire thee of thy clemencie breifely to heare vs.

5 Vve haue found this man peſtiferous, and raiſing ſeditiōs to al the Ievves in the vvhole vvorld, and authour of the ſedition of the ſecte of the Nazarenes,

6 vvho alſo hath attempted to violat the temple, vvhom alſo being apprehended vve vvould haue iudged according to our lavv.

7 But Lyſias the Tribune comming in, vvith great force tooke him avvay out of our handes,

8 commaunding his accuſers to come to thee, of vvhom thou maieſt thy ſelf iudging, vnderſtand of al theſe things, vvhereof vve accuſe him.

9 And the Ievves alſo added, ſaying that theſe things vvere ſo.

10 But Paul anſvvered, (the Preſident making a ſigne vnto him for to ſpeake.) Knovving that of many yeres tho⟨illegible⟩ art iudge ouer this nation, I vvil vvith good courage anſvver for my ſelf.

11 For thou maieſt vnderſtand that it is not aboue tvvelue daies to me, ſince I vvent vp to adore in Hieruſalem.

12 and neither in the temple did they finde me diſputing vvith any man, or cauſing concourſe of the multitude, neither in the ſynagogs, nor in the citie:

13 neither can they proue vnto thee the things vvhereof they novv accuſe me.

14 But this I confeſſe to thee, that according to the ſecte, vvhich they call hereſie, I doe ſo ſerue the father my God', beleeuing al things that are vvritten in the Law & the Prophets:

15 hauing hope in God, the vvhich theſe alſo them ſelues expect, that there ſhal be a reſurrectiō of iuſt and vniuſt.

16 In this my ſelf alſo doe ſtudie to haue a cōſcience vvithout offenſe tovvard God & toward men alvvaies.

17 And after many yeres * I came to beſtovv almes vpon my nation, & oblations, and vovves.

18 In the vvhich they foūd me * purified in the tēple: not vvith multitude nor vvith tumult.

19 But certaine Ievves of Aſia, vvho ought to be preſent before thee and to accuſe, if they had any thing againſt me:

20 or let theſe men thē ſelues ſay, if they haue found in me any iniquitie, foraſmuch as I ſtād in the Councel,

21 but of this one voice only that I cried ſtāding among them, That * of the reſurrection of the dead am I iudged this day of you.

22 And Felix differed them, knovving moſt certainely of this vvay, ſaying, Vvhen Lyſias the Tribune is come dovvne, I vvil heare you.

23 And he commaunded the Centurion to keepe him, and that he ſhould haue reſt, neither to prohibit any of his to miniſter vnto him.

24 And after ſome daies, Felix comming vvith Druſilla his vvife, vvhich vvas a Ievve, called Paul, and heard of him the faith that is in Chriſt IESVS.

25 And he diſputing of iuſtice and chaſtiti⟨illegible⟩, and of the iudgement to come, Felix being terrified, anſvvered, For this time, goe thy vvay: but in time conuenient I vvil ſend for thee.

26 hoping alſo vvithal, that money vvould be giuen him of Paul, for the vvhich cauſe alſo oftentimes ſending for him, he ſpake vvith him.

27 But vvhen tvvo yeres vvere ended, Felix had a ſucceſſour Portius Feſtus. And Felix being vvilling to ſhevv the Ievves a pleaſure, left Paul in priſon.

Marginal notes to Chapter 24

v. 5 ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 14 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 14 ⸬ Becauſe Tertullꝰ the Iewes orator called Chriſtian religion the ſect or (as it is there verſ. ⟨illegible⟩ in the Greeke) the hereſie of the Nazarens: S. Paul anſvvereth and ſhevveth that it is no hereſie. And as for the word, Sect. in this place: it is in the Greeke, According to the vvay, vvhich they call hereſie, as alſo Act. 9, 2. 24▪ 22. And therfore the vvord ſect here is ſo taken. See Annot. c. ⟨illegible⟩, ⟨illegible⟩2.
v. 14 ᶜ the God of my fathers,
v. 16 Ro. 15, 28
v. 18 Act. 21, 26.
v. 21 Act. 23, 6.
v. 25 ⸬ The Apoſtolike teaching was not of only or ſpecial faith, but of iuſtice, & chaſtitie, & iudgement, that is to ſay, of the terrour of Hel and other Gods iudgements in the next life anſvverable to our deedes in this vvorld: by vvhich the hearers vvere firſt terrified, and ſo induced to penance. Hovv ſay Heretikes then that ſuch things make men hypocrit⟨illegible⟩s.

Chapter 25

After tvvo yeres empriſonment the Ievves continevv their ſute againſt him, ſoliciting the nevv Preſident Feſtus, ⟨illegible⟩ firſt at Hieruſalem, then at Caeſarea: 9 vvhere through the Ievves partialitie he is faine to appeale vnto the Emperour: 13 and is in the meane time brought forth by Feſtus (giuing him good teſtimonie, notvvithſtanding the exclamations of the Ievves againſt him) vnto king Agrippa and his Queene Bernice.

1 FESTVS therfore vvhen he vvas come into the prouince, after three daies vvent vp to Hieruſalem from Caeſaréa.

2 And the cheefe prieſts, & principal men of the Ievves vvent vnto him againſt Paul: and they deſired him,

3 requeſting fauour againſt him, that he vvould commaund him to be brought to Hieruſalem, laying vvaite for to kil him in the vvay.

4 But Feſtus anſvvered, that Paul is in Caeſaréa: and that he vvould very ſhortly goe thither.

5 They therfore, ſaith he, that are of abilitie among you, going dovvne vvith me, if there be any crime in the man, let them accuſe him.

6 And hauing taried among them not aboue eight or ten daies, he vvent dovvne to Caeſaréa, and the next day he ſate in the iudgement ſeate: and he commaunded Paul to be brought.

7 Vvho being brought, there ſtoode about him the Ievves that vvere come dovvne from Hieruſalem, obiecting many and greuous cauſes vvhich, they could not proue,

8 Paul making anſvver, That neither againſt the lavv of the Ievves, nor againſt the temple, nor againſt Caeſar haue I any thing offended.

9 But Feſtus vvilling to ſhevv the Ievves a pleaſure, anſvvering Paul, ſaid, Vvilt thou goe vp to Hieruſalem, and there be iudged of theſe things before me?

10 And Paul ſaid, At Caeſars iudgemēt ſeate doe I ſtand, vvhere I ought to be iudged: the Ievves I haue not hurt, as thou very vvel knovveſt.

11 For if I haue hurt them, or done any thing vvorthie of death, I refuſe not to die. but if none of thoſe things be, vvhereof theſe accuſe me, no man can giue me to them I appeale to Caeſar.

12 Then Feſtus hauing conferred vvith the Councel, anſvvered, Haſt thou appealed to Caeſar? to Caeſar ſhalt thou goe.

13 And vvhen certaine daies vvere paſſed, king Agrippa & Berníce came dovvne to Caeſaréa to ſalute Feſtus.

14 And as they taried there a good many daies, Feſtus ſignified to the king, of Paul, ſaying, A certaine perſon vvas left priſoner by Felix,

15 concerning vvhom, vvhen I vvas at Hieruſalem, the cheefe prieſts and the auncients of the Ievves came vnto me, deſyring condemnation againſt him.

16 To vvhom I anſvvered, That it is not the Romanes cuſtome to yeld vp any man before that he vvhich is accuſed haue his accuſers preſent and take place to make his anſvver for to cleere him ſelf of the crimes.

17 Vvhen they therfore vvere aſſembled hither, vvithout any delaie, the day folovving, ſitting in the iudgement ſeat▪ I commaunded the man to be brought.

18 Of vvhom, vvhen the accuſers ſtoode vp, they brought no cauſe vvhich I thought il of:

19 but certaine queſtions of their ovvne ſuperſtition they had againſt him, and of one IESVS deceaſed, vvhom Paul affirmed to liue.

20 Doubting therfore of this kinde of queſtion, I ſaid, vvhether he vvould goe to Hieruſalem, & there be iudged of theſe things.

21 But Paul appealing to be kept vnto the knovvledge of Auguſtus, I commaunded him to be kept, til I ſend him to Caeſar.

22 And Agrippa ſaid to Feſtus, My ſelf alſo vvould heare the man. To morovv, ſaid he, thou ſhalt heare him.

23 And the next day vvhen Agrippa and Bernice vvere come vvith great pompe, and had entred into the hall of audience vvith the Tribunes and principal men of the citie, at Feſtus commaundement Paul vvas brought.

24 And Feſtus ſaith, King Agrippa, and al ye men that are preſent together vvith vs, you ſee this man, concerning vvhom al the multitude of the Ievves called vpon me at Hieruſalem, requeſting and crying out that he ought not to liue any longer.

25 Yet haue I found nothing that he hath committed vvorthie of death. But foraſmuch as he himſelf appealed to Auguſtus, I haue determined to ſend him.

26 Of vvhom vvhat to vvrite for certaintie to my lord, I haue not. For the vvhich cauſe I haue brought him forth to you, and eſpecially to thee, king Agrippa, that examination being made, I may haue vvhat to vvrite.

27 For it ſeemeth to me vvithout reaſon, to ſend a priſoner, & not to ſignifie his cauſes.

Marginal notes to Chapter 25

v. 7 ᶜ crimes as ⟨illegible⟩. 27.
v. 11 ⸬ If S. Paul both to ſaue him ſelf from vvhipping and from death ſought by the Ievves, doubted not to crie for ſuccour of the Romane lawes, and to appeale to Caeſar the Prince of the Romans not yet Chriſtened: hovv much more may vve call for aide of Chriſtian Princes and their lavves, for the puniſhment of Heretikes, and for the Churches defenſe againſt them? S. Auguſtine ep. 50.
v. 19 ⸬ This vvhom he termeth by contempt, one IESVS, hath novv made al the Romane Emperours and Princes of the world to know him, and hath giuen the ſeate of the Caeſars to his poore ſeruants, Peter & his ſucceſſors.
v. 27 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩

Chapter 26

In that honorable Audience being permitted to ſpeake, 2 he declareth to the king vvhat he firſt vvas, 1⟨illegible⟩ and hovv miraculouſly he vvas conuerted, 19 and that he hath preached ſin⟨illegible⟩, as he vvas commaunded from heauen, and as the Prophets had foretold of Chriſt. 24 Which ſtrange tale Feſtus the Heathen Preſident hearing, ſaith that he is mad. 25 But he anſvvereth, and exhorteth them al to be Chriſtians as he is. ⟨illegible⟩0 They finally pronounce that he might be ſet at libertie, but only for his appeale.

1 BVT Agrippa ſaid to Paul, Thou art permitted to ſpeake for thy ſelf. Then Paul ſtretching forth his hand, began to make his anſvver.

2 Touching al things vvhereof I am accuſed of the Ievves, king Agrippa, I account my ſelf happie for that I am to defend my ſelf this day before thee,

3 eſpecially vvhereas thou knovveſt al things that are among the Ievves, cuſtomes and queſtions: for the vvhich cauſe I beſeeche thee, heare me patiently.

4 And my life truely from my youth, vvhich vvas from the beginning in my nation in Hieruſalem, al the Ievves doe knovv:

5 knovving me before from the beginning (if they vvil giue teſtimonie) that according to the moſt ſure ſecte of our religion I liued a Phariſee.

6 And novv for the hope of the promiſſe that vvas made of God to our fathers, doe I ſtand ſubiect to iudgement.

7 the vvhich, our tvvelue tribes ſeruing night and day, hope to come vnto. Of the vvhich hope, o king, I am accuſed of the Ievves.

8 Vvhat incredible thing is it iudged vvith you, if God raiſe the dead?

9 And my ſelf truely had thought that I ought to doe againſt the name of IESVS of Nazareth many contrarie things.

10 Vvhich alſo I * did at Hieruſalem, and many of the ſaincts did I ſhut vp in priſons, hauing receiued authoritie of the cheefe prieſts: and vvhen they vvere put to death, I brought the ſentence.

11 And through out al the ſynagogs often times puniſhing them, I cōpelled them to blaſpheme: and yet more mad againſt them, I perſecuted them euen vnto foraine cities.

12 Among vvhich things vvhiles * I vvent to Damaſcus vvith authoritie and permiſſion of the cheefe prieſts,

13 at midday, in the vvay, I ſavv (o king) from heauen a light to haue ſhined round about me and them that vvere in companie vvith me, aboue the brightnes of the ſunne.

14 And vvhen al vve vvere fallen dovvne on the ground, I heard a voice ſpeaking to me in the Hebrew tongue: Saul, Saul, vvhy perſecureſt thou me? It is hard for thee to kicke againſt the pricke.

15 And I ſaid, Vvho art thou Lord? And our Lord anſvvered, I am IESVS vvhom thou doeſt perſecure.

16 But riſe vp and ſtand vpon thy feete: for to this end haue I appeared to thee, that I may ordaine thee a miniſter and vvitnes of thoſe things vvhich thou haſt ſeen, and of thoſe things vvherein I vvil appeare to thee,

17 deliuering thee out of the peoples & natiōs vnto the vvhich novv I ſend thee,

18 to opē their eies, that they may be conuerted from darkenes to light, and from the povver of Satan to God, that they may receiue remiſſion of ſinnes and lot among the ſaincts by the faith that is in me.

19 Vvherevpon, king Agrippa, I vvas not incredulous to the heauenly viſion:

20 but to them firſt that are at Damaſcus, and at Hieruſalem, and vnto al the countrie of levvrie, and to the Gentiles * did I preach that they ſhould doe penāce, and turne to God, doing vvorkes vvorthie of penance.

21 For this cauſe the Ievves, vvhen I vvas in the temple, * apprehending me, attēpted meaning to kil me.

22 But aided by the help of God, I ſtand vntil this day, teſtifying to ſmall and to great, ſaying nothing beſide thoſe things vvhich the Prophets did ſpeake ſhould come to paſſe, & Moyſes,

23 if CHRIST vvere paſſible, if the firſt of the reſurrection from the dead, he vvere to ſhevv light to the people and to the Gentiles.

24 As he ſpake theſe things made his anſvver, Feſtus vvith a loud voice ſaid, Thou art mad, Paul: much learning turneth thee to madneſſe.

25 And Paul ſaid, I am not mad, moſt excellent Feſtus: but I ſpeake vvordes of veritie and ſo brietie.

26 for the king knovveth of theſe things, to vvhom alſo I ſpeake conſtantly▪ for I thinke none, of theſe things to be vnknovven to him. For neither vvas any of theſe things done in a corner.

27 Beleeueſt thou the prophets, king Agrippa? I knovv that thou beleeueſt,

28 And Agrippa ſaid to Paul: A litle thou perſuadeſt me to become a CHRISTIAN.

29 And Paul ſaid, I vviſh of God, both in litle, and in much, not only thee, but alſo al that heare this day, to become ſuch as I am alſo, except theſe bandes.

30 And the king roſe vp, and the Preſident, and Bernice, and they that ſate by them.

31 And going a ſide, they ſpake among them ſelues, ſaying, That this man hath done nothing vvorthie of death or bandes.

32 And Agrippa ſaid to Feſtus, This man might be releaſed, if he had not appealed to Caeſar.

Marginal notes to Chapter 26

v. 5 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 7 ᵇ inquā
v. 7 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 9 Act. 8, 3.
v. 10 ᶜ detuli ſententi⟨illegible⟩.
v. 11 Act. 9, 3.
v. 20 Act. 9, 20.
v. 20 ⸬ Penāce often inculcated, and vvorkes agreable to the ſame.
v. 21 Act. 21, 30.

Chapter 27

What a dangerous nauigation he had tovvards Rom⟨illegible⟩: and that by his prediction and counſel the ſhip might haue been ſaued. And for his ſake (as God alſo reuealed to him before) al the companie vvas preſerued, being 276 perſons.

1 AND after it vvas decreed that he ſhould ſaile into Italie, and that Paul vvith other priſoners ſhould be deliuered to a Centurion named Iulius, of the band Auguſta,

2 vve going vp into a ſhip of Adrumétum, beginning to ſail about the places of Aſia, looſed from the land, Ariſtarchus the Macedonian of Theſſalonica continuing vvith vs.

3 And the day folovving vve came to Sidon. And Iulius intreating Paul courteouſly, permitted him to goe to his frendes, and to take care of him ſelf.

4 And vvhen vve had looſed thēce, vve ſailed vnder Cypres: becauſe the vvindes vvere cōtrarie.

5 And ſailing the ſea of Cilicia and Pamphilia, vve came to Lyſtra', vvhich is in Lycia:

6 and there the Centurion finding a ſhip of Alexandria ſailing into Italie, remoued vs into it.

7 And vvhereas many daies vve ſailed ſlovvly, & vvere ſcarſe come ouer againſt Gnidus, the vvinde hindering vs, vve ſailed neere Crete by Salmóne:

8 and vvith much a doe ſailing by it, vve came into a certaine place that is called Good-hauens, nigh to the vvhich vvas a citie Thalaſſa.

9 And vvhen much time vvas ſpent, and vvhereas novv it vvas not ſafe ſailing, becauſe the faſt novv vvas paſt, Paul comforted them,

10 ſaying to them, Ye men, I ſee that the ſailing beginneth to be vvith hurt and much damage not only of the lading and the ſhip, but alſo of our liues.

11 But the Centurion beleeued the gouernour and maiſter of the ſhip, more then thoſe things vvhich vvere ſaid of Paul.

12 And vvhereas it vvas not a commodious hauen to vvinter in, very many taking counſel appointed to ſaile thence, if by any meanes they might comming to Phoeníce, vvinter there, a hauen of Crete looking tovvard the Afrike and the Chore.

13 And the ſouth vvinde blovving, they thinking that they had obteined their purpoſe, vvhen they had parted from Aſſon, ſailed along by Crete.

14 But not long after, a tempeſtous vvinde that is called Euro-aquilo, droue againſt it.

15 And vvhen the ſhippe vvas caught and could not make vvay againſt the vvinde, giuing, vp the ſhip to the vvindes, vve vvere driuen.

16 And running vpon a certaine iland, that is called Cauda, vve could ſcarſe get the cock-boate.

17 Vvhich being taken vp, they vſed helps, girding the ſhip, and fearing leſt they ſhould fall into the Syrte, letting dovvne the veſſel, ſo vvere they caried.

18 And vvhen vve vvere mightly toſſed vvith the tempeſt, the next day they caſt forth,

19 And the third day vvith their ovvne handes they threvve forth the tacklinges of the ſhip.

20 And neither ſunne, nor ſtarres appearing for many daies, and no ſmal ſtorme being tovvard, al hope vvas novv taken avvay of our ſauing.

21 And vvhen there had been long faſting, then Paul ſtanding in the middes of them, ſaid, You ſhould in deede, O ye men, haue heard me, and not haue parted from Crete, & haue gained this hurt and loſſe.

22 And novv I exhort you to be of good cheere. for there ſhal be no loſſe of any ſoule amōg you, but of the ſhip.

23 For ″ an Angel of the God vvhoſe I am, and vvhom I ſerue, ſtoode by me this night,

24 ſaying, Feare not Paul, thou muſt appeare before Caeſar: and behold God hath giuen thee al that ſaile vvith thee.

25 For the vvhich cauſe be of good cheere ye men: for I beleeue God, that it ſhal ſo be, as it hath been ſaid to me.

26 And vve m⟨illegible⟩ſt come vnto a ce⟨illegible⟩t⟨illegible⟩ine ilande.

27 But after the fourtenth night vvas come on vs, as vve vvere ſailing in Adria about midnight, the ſhipmen deemed that there appeared ſome countrie to them.

28 Vvho alſo ſounding, found tvventie fadomes: and being parted a litle from thence, they found fiftene fadomes,

29 And fearing leſt vve ſhould fall into rough places; caſting out of the ſterne foure anker⟨illegible⟩, they vviſhed that day vvere come.

30 But as the ſhipmen ſought to flee out of the ſhip, hauing let dovvne the cock-boate into the ſea, pretēding as if they vvere about to caſt out ankers out of the fore part of the ſhip,

31 Paul ſaid to the Centurion and to the ſouldiars, ″ Vnles ⟨illegible⟩heſc tarie in the ſhip, you can not be ſaued.

32 Then the ſouldiars cut of the ropes of the cockboate: and ſuffered it to fal avvay.

33 And vvhen it began to be light, Paul deſired all to take meate, ſaying, This day is the fourtenth day that you expect and remaine faſting, taking nothing.

34 For the vvhich cauſe I deſire you to take meate for your health ſake: for there ſhal not an heare of the head periſh of any of you.

35 And vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, taking bread, he gaue thankes to God in the ſight of them al: and vvhen he had broken it, he began to eate.

36 And being al made of better cheere, they alſo tooke meate.

37 And vve vvere in al the ſhip, ſoules tvvo hundred ſeuentie ſixe.

38 And being filled vvith meate, they lighted the ſhip, caſting the vvheat into the ſea.

39 And vvhen day vvas come, they knevv not the land: but they ſpied a certaine creeke that had a ſhore, into the vvhich they minded, if they could, to caſt a land the ſhip.

40 And vvhen they had taken vp the ankers, they committed them ſelues to the ſea, looſing vvithal the rudder bands: and hoiſing vp the maine ſaile according as the vvinde blevve, they vvent on tovvard the ſhore.

41 And vvhen vve vvere fallen into a place betvvene tvvo ſeas, they graueled the ſhip; and the fore-part truly ſticking faſt remained vnmoueable: but the hinder part vvas broken by the violence of the ſea.

42 And the counſel of the ſouldiars vvas, that they ſhould kil the priſoners: leſt any ſvvimming out, might runne avvay.

43 But the Centurion vvilling to ſaue Paul, forbade it to be done: & he commaunded them that could ſvvimme, to caſt out them ſelues firſt, and eſcape, and goe forth to land:

44 and the reſt, ſome they caried on bordes, and ſome vpon thoſe things that vvere of the ſhip. And ſo it came to paſſe, that al the ſoules eſcaped to land.

Marginal notes to Chapter 27

v. 5 Myra'
v. 9 ⸬ It may ſignifie the Ievves faſt of the ſeuenth moneth Septēber, after vvhich the nauigation vvas perilous, vvinter approching.
v. 12 ᶜ names of vvindés.
v. 16 ᶜ Graec. Clauda.
v. 17 ᶜ a place of quicke ſandes.
v. 23 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩.
v. 24 ⸬ Paul (ſaith S. Hierom) had ſo many ſoules in the ſhip giuen him, that is, ſo many men ſaued for his ſake: and after he is vvith Chriſt, ſhal he ſhut his mouth, and not be able once to ſpeake for them that haue beleeued in his Goſpel? Hiero. adu. vigil. Vvhereby he proueth that if ⟨illegible⟩od do much for the merits of Saincts in this life, much more at their interceſſion & pr⟨illegible⟩r in heauen.

Annotations to Chapter 27

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XXVII.

23. An Angel.] S. Paul had many viſions, ſpecially to aſſure him that he ſhould to Rome and ſtand before Caesar, our Lord him ſelf before (23, ⟨illegible⟩) appearing to him, and here an Angel, for that purpoſe. Vvhereby vve plaiuely ſee the ſpecial prouidence of God tovvard that See, vvher his tvvo principal Apoſtles vvere deſigned to preach, plant the faith, liue, die, be buried, and honoured til the vvorldes end. [Margin: Gods prouidēce to the See of ROME.]

⟨illegible⟩1. Vnles theſe tari⟨illegible⟩] Vvhen God reuealeth to vs any thing, or aſſureth vs of any euent to come, he diſchargeth vs not thereby of our requiſite endeuours and labours for atcheiuing the ſame, not executing ordinarily his deſignements tovvards men othervviſe then by their ovvne free vvil and actions. S. Paul ſaid not here. Let vs do vvhat vve liſt: vvorke vve or ſit vve ſtil, vvhether the mariners goe out or tarie vvithin, vve are al ſure to be ſaued, for ſo God hath reuealed to me, and he can not lie, neither can it fall othervviſe▪ but contrarievviſe ſaith he▪ If theſe mariners leaue the ſhip, you can not be ſaued. So ſay al true Catholike preachers to Chriſtian people, Vvhat prouidence, predeſtination, or foreſight ſo euer God haue of your ſaluation, you are not thereby conſtrained any vvay, you haue free vvil ſtil, and can not be ſaued (though you be predeſtinate) except you keepe Gods commaundements, repent you of your ſinnes, beleeue, liue and die vvel. And if it vvere reuealed to any mā, that he vvere one of Gods electe, & that he ſhould finally die in grace and be ſaued, yet he vvere bound to vvorke his ſaluation vvith feare and trembling, as ⟨illegible⟩ S. Paul both did, and taught, leſt he become reprobate: no leſſe then the ſame Apoſtle here and his ſellovves, though they had their life promiſed to them of God, yet vvere bound to labour and vſe al poſſible diligence that they might not be drovvned. [Margin: Gods predeſtination and appointment taketh not away mans free vvil and endeuours. · 1 Cor. 9, 2⟨illegible⟩ ▪ · Philip. ⟨illegible⟩, 18.]

Chapter 28

After their ſhipvvracke hauing vvintered in the Iland (novv named Malta) vvhere many miracles vvere vvrought by Paul, they take ſhip againe, and ſo by Sicile they co⟨illegible⟩ to Puteoli in Itali, the Chriſtian Romans comming a great vvay to meete him, to his great ioy. 16 Finally being come to Rome, in his lodging he declareth to the Iewes his cauſe, 23 and on day appointed preacheth IESVS vnto them. 25 And ſeeing their incredulitie, he ſhevveth hovv it vvas foretold by Eſay: 2⟨illegible⟩ but that the Gentil⟨illegible⟩ vvil not be incredulous. 10 To vvhom be there preacheth tvvo vvhole yeres vvithout prohibition.

1 AND vvhen vve had eſcaped, then vve knevv that the iland vvas called Mityléne. But the Barbarous ſhevved vs no ſmal courteſie.

2 For, kindling a fire they refreſhed vs al, becauſe of the imminent raine and the colde.

3 And vvhen Paul had gathered together ſome number of ſtickes, and had laide them on the fire, a viper iſſuing out of the heate, inuaded his hand.

4 But as the Barbarous ſavv the beaſt hanging on his hand, they ſaid one to an other, Vndoubtedly this man is a murderer, vvho being eſcaped out of the ſea, Vengeance doth not ſuffer him to liue.

5 And he in deede ″ ſhaking of the beaſt into the fire, ſuffred no harme.

6 But they ſuppoſed that he ſhould be turned into a ſvvelling, and that he vvould ſodenly fall and die. But expecting long and ſeeing that there vvas no harme done on him, being changed they ſaid, that he vvas a God.

7 And in thoſe places vvere lands of the prince of the ile, named Publius, vvho receiuing vs, for three daies intreated vs courteouſly.

8 And it chaunced that the father of Publius lay vexed vvith feuers and the bloudy flixe. Vnto vvhom Paul entred: and vvhen he had praied, and impoſed hands on him, he healed him.

9 Vvhich being done, al in the ile alſo that had infirmities, came, and vvere cured:

10 vvho alſo honoured vs vvith many honours, and vvhen vve vvere ſailing avvay, laded vs vvith neceſſaries.

11 And after three moneths, vve ſailed in a ſhip of Alexandria, that had vvintered in the iland, vvhoſe ſigne vvas the Caſtors.

12 And vvhen vve vvere come to Syracùſa, vve taried there three daies.

13 Thence compaſſing by the ſhore, vve came to Rhegium: and after one day the South vvinde blovving, vve came the ſecond day to Putéoli,

14 vvhere finding brethren, vve vvere deſired to tarle vvith them ſeuen daies: and ſo vve came to Rome.

15 And from thence, vvhen the brethren had heard, they came to meete vs vnto Apij-forum, and the Three-tauerns. Vvhom vvhen Paul had ſeen, giuing thanks to God, he tooke courage.

16 And vvhen vve vvere come to Rome, Paul vvas permitted to remaine to him ſelf vvith a ſouldiar that kept him.

17 And after the third day he called together the cheefe of the Ievves. And vvhen they vvere aſſembled, he ſaid to them, Men brethren, I doing nothing againſt the people, or the cuſtome of the fathers, vvas deliuered priſoner from Hieruſalem into the hands of the Romanes,

18 vvho vvhen they had examined me, vvould haue releaſed me, for that there vvas no cauſe of death in me.

19 But the Ievves contradicting it, I vvas compelled to appeale vnto Caeſar, not as hauing any thing to accuſe my nation.

20 For this cauſe therefore I deſired to ſee you and to ſpeake to you for, becauſe of the hope of Iſraël, am I compaſſed vvith this ″ chaine.

21 But they ſaid to him, Vve neither receiued letters concerning thee from Ievvrie, neither did any of the brethren that came hither, report or ſpeake any euil of thee.

22 But vve deſire of thee to heare vvhat thou thinkeſt: for ″ concerning this ſecte, it is knovvē to vs that it is gaine ſaid euery vvhere.

23 And vvhen they had appointed him a day, they came to him vnto his lodging very many: to vvhom he expounded, teſtifying the kingdom of God, and vſing perſuaſion to them of IESVS out of the lavv of Moyſes and the Prophets, from morning vntil euening.

24 And certaine beleeued thoſe things that vvere ſaid: but certaine beleeued not.

25 And vvhereas they did not agree among them ſelues, they departed, Paul ſaying one vvord: That vvel did the holy Ghoſt ſpeake by Eſaie the prophet to our fathers,

26 ſaying, Goe to this people, and ſay to them, Vvith the care you ſhal heare, and ſhal not vnderſtand: and ſeeing you ſhal ſee, and ſhal not perceiue.

27 For the hart of this people is vva⟨illegible⟩en groſſe, and vvith their eares haue they heauily heard, and their eies they haue ſhut: left perhaps they may ſee vvith their eies, and heare vvith their eares, and vnderſtand vvith their hart, and be conuerted, and I heale them.

28 Be it knovven therfore to you, that this Saluation of God is ſent to the Gentiles, and they vvil heare.

29 And vvhen he had ſaid theſe things, the Ievves vvent out from him, hauing much queſtioning among them ſelues.

30 And he taried ful tvvo yeres in his hired lodging: and he receiued al that came into him,

31 preaching the kingdom of God, and ⟨illegible⟩eaching the things that concerne our Lord IESVS CHRIST vvith al confidence, vvithout prohibition.

Marginal notes to Chapter 28

v. 1 ⸬ This iland (novv Malta) is the ſeate of the knightes of the Rhodes, the inhabitāts vvherof haue a ſpecial deuotion to S. Paul: to whō both the cheefe Church (being the Biſhops Seate) is dedicated, and the vvhole Iland (as they count it) conſecrated. Where the people ſhevv yet to ſtrāgers, his priſon and other memories of his miracles.
v. 1 Melita▪
v. 4 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 22 ᶜ ⟨non-Latin script⟩
v. 25 Eſa 6, 9.
v. 26 Mat. 13, 14. Mr. 4, 12.
v. 27 Lu. 8, 10▪
v. 27 ⸬ Here alſo (as Ma⟨illegible⟩. 1⟨illegible⟩.) it is plaine that they would not ſee, northeare, & that their excecatiō is to be attributed to thē ſelues & not to God. See annota. Io. 12, 40.
v. 27 Io. 12, 40▪
v. 27 Ro. 11, 8▪

Annotations to Chapter 28

ANNOTATIONS CHAP. XXVIII.

⟨illegible⟩. Shaking of the beaſt.] The promes of Chriſt (Marc. 16) that venemous ſerpents ſhould not hurt them that beleeue in him, is fulfilled not in al beleuers, but in ſuch as had the gift of miracles, as S. Paul had. Vvhom here a viper by nature ſo venemous that the people thought he ſhould haue died out of hand, did no vvhit annoy: he extinguiſhing by the povver of Chriſt al the poiſon of the beaſt. Yea and (as the Chriſtian people there til this day beleeue) by S. Paules praiers the Iland vvas deliuered for euer from al ſuch venemous ſerpents, in ſo much that children there play vvith ſcorpions euer ſince that time, and Pilgrimes daily carie vvith them peeces of ſtones out of the place vvhere. S. Paul abode, by vvhich they affirme that they heale them vvhich in other countries adioyning are bitten of ſcorpions, the medicine therfore being called, S. Paules grace. The Heretikes that knovv not the povver of God, nor the miraculous vertues giuen to his Saincts, maruel and blaſpheme, vvhen they beare ſuch things as be proper to certaine countries, attributed ſometimes to Gods miracles done by his Saincts ⟨illegible⟩ as though that vvere not poſſible, or vvere not as much to Gods honour, and more, then things proceding only of natural cauſes. Such profane men vvould not haue attributed the holſom⟨illegible⟩es of the vvaters of Iericho to Eliſeus his vertue and miracles, amending them by caſting ſalt into them, if the Scripture had not expreſly teſtified the ſame. It is the part of al faithful men to referre ſuch things to God, vvhen any iuſt occaſion is giuen therevnto, rather then to nature: though the incredulous doe alvvaies contrarie, for feare of ſuperſtition & diſhonouring God. As though this eſcape of drovvning, might better and more to Gods glorie, be referted to chaunce and the mariners induſtrie, then to S. Paules praiers and extraordinarie vvorking. [Margin: Malta hath S. Paules bleſſing and grace vntil this day. · The. Fazellus de rebus Siculis decad. ⟨illegible⟩ li. ⟨illegible⟩. 1. · Gods miraculous vertue in certaine countries and creatures, by his Saincts. · 4 Reg. 2, 19▪]

⟨illegible⟩0. Chaine.] I vvould vviſh novv (ſaith S. Chryſtome) to be for a time in the place vvhere theſe chaines remaine, and to ſee the ⟨illegible⟩etters vvhich Diuels feare, and Angels reuerence. homil. 5 ad populum Antiochenum. See alſo S. Gregorie lib. ⟨illegible⟩. epiſto. ⟨illegible⟩0. of the miracles done by S. Paules chaines, and that he ſendeth to the Empereſſe Conſtantia ſome duſt thereof ⟨illegible⟩ of, for a great Relike and holy gift. [Margin: S. Pauls chaines h⟨illegible⟩onoured.]

22. Concerning this ſect.) The Heretikes of al ſortes comfort them ſelues much, vvhen they finde here or els vvhere the Chriſtian faith called of the Ievves or incredulous perſons, a Sect or an Hereſie, & ſometimes in contempt of Chriſtes perſon the Maiſter of the ſame, the Secte of the Nazarens: as though the Church of God might as vvel erre in naming their doctrine Hereſie, as the Ievves and Pagans might and did miſſe in condemning Chriſtian religion for an Hereſie: or as though the Proteſtants doctrine vvere as vvel proued and tried to be no Hereſie, by the Proph⟨illegible⟩ts and other Scriptures, miracles, and conſent of al Nations and ages, as Chriſtes bleſſed doctrine is. Vvhereas in deed the Proteſtants doctrine is euidently conuinced to be heretical, by the ſame arguments that Chriſtes religion is proued to be the only true doctrine of ſaluation, and not an hereſie. And vvhoſoeuer can deduce the Chriſtian faith from Adam to this day, through out al the Fathers, Patriarches, Prophetes, Prieſts, Apoſtles, and Biſhops, by deſcent and ſucceſſion of al lavves and ſtates of true vvorſhippers and beleeuers (vvhich is the only or ſpecial vvay to proue that the Chriſtian faith is no hereſie) he ſhal by the ſame meanes al at once proue the Proteſtants doctrine to be an hereſie and a falſe ſecte. That the Ievves therfore and il men in al places contradicted the Chriſtian religion, calling it an Hereſie or a Sect, as though it had a beginning of ſome certaine Sect-Maiſter other them God him ſelf, they vvere deceiued: and the Church of God neuertheleſſe calling the Proteſtants doctrine Hereſie in the vvorſt part that can be, and in the vvorſt ſort that euer vvas, doth right and moſt iuſtly. [Margin: The name of Sect is vvel giuen to al Hereſies, though the Chriſtian religion at the firſt vvas falſely ſo called.]

The end of the Actes of the Apoſtles.

Vvherevnto we ioyne for the readers behalfe, tvvo Tables of the tvvo cheefe Apoſtles, and a note of the reſt, as an abridgement of the ſaid booke, and a ſupply of ſome things not there mentioned.

Colophon

Printed edition: The Nevv Testament of Iesus Christ, translated faithfully into English, out of the authentical Latin … in the English College of Rhemes (Rhemes: Iohn Fogny, 1582; STC 2884, ESTC S102491), the Catholic New Testament translated from the Latin Vulgate chiefly by Gregory Martin. Copy transcribed: the Eton College Library copy, as filmed for Early English Books Online (image set 2646).

Transcription: Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership (EEBO-TCP), Phase I text A16049 (keyed 2005–06, proofread and released 2006), placed in the public domain under Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal. Converted for the Good Works Library in October 2026.

What was done: the spelling, punctuation and capitals of the transcription are kept exactly, including u/v, i/j, "vv" for w, long s (ſ), the abbreviation stroke (as in "vpō") and the edition's own marks (″ for an annotated word, ⸬ and * for marginal references, ⊢ for the end of a liturgical Gospel or Epistle; ▪ is the transcribers' sign for a punctuation mark they could not identify). Removed as apparatus: the TEI markup, page breaks, line-end hyphenation, and the small cross ✝ that the edition sets at the beginning of each verse beside the verse number in the margin; the number is given here instead. Marginal notes are gathered after each chapter, keyed to their verse; the annotations follow as the edition prints them. Words the transcribers could not read are shown as ⟨illegible⟩; words printed in Greek or other non-Latin letters, which the transcription did not key, are shown as ⟨non-Latin script⟩. No gap has been filled or guessed.

The book's heading in the edition reads: "THE ACTES OF THE APOSTLES." The page title gives it in ordinary capitals and lower case, without other change.

Notes on this transcription: Acts 10:23: a verse cross ✝ stands within this verse with no verse number beside it; kept as printed. Acts 22: the number 24 is printed twice, on two successive verses; kept as printed.

On this page 294 places are marked ⟨illegible⟩ and 36 words or phrases in Greek or other non-Latin letters are marked ⟨non-Latin script⟩.

This is an archival transcription of a historic English Bible. It is not a Good Works Translation.

🌲